Schneider Electric Circuit Monitor Series 4000 User Guide
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Instruction Bulletin
PowerLogic
®
Circuit Monitor
Series 4000 Reference Manual
(Includes Models 4000, 4250, 4000T)
Retain for future use.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
HAZARD CATEGORIES AND SPECIAL SYMBOLS
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in property damage.
NOTE: Provides additional information to clarify or simplify a procedure.
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.
FCC NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This
Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Table of Contents
Accessories and Options for the Circuit Monitor ................................... 1
Topics Not Covered in This Bulletin ............................................................ 4
How the Buttons Work ........................................................................... 7
Display Menu Conventions .................................................................... 8
Selecting a Menu Option ................................................................. 8
Changing a Value ............................................................................ 8
Cycling Screens on the Display ............................................................. 9
Configuring the Circuit Monitor using the Setup Menu ............................. 11
Setting Up the Display ......................................................................... 11
Setting Up the Communications .......................................................... 12
Setting the Device Address ........................................................... 12
RS-485, RS-232, and Infrared Port Communications Setup ......... 12
Ethernet Communications Card (ECC) Setup ............................... 13
Redirecting the IR Port to the ECC Subnet ................................... 14
Redirecting the RS-232 Port to the ECC Subnet........................... 15
Redirecting the RS-232 to the RS-485 Port .................................. 16
Redirecting the IR Port of the Display to the RS-485 .................... 17
Setting Up the Metering Functions of the Circuit Monitor .................... 17
Setting Up Alarms ............................................................................... 19
Setpoint Learning .......................................................................... 20
Creating a New Custom Alarm ...................................................... 21
Setting Up and Editing Alarms....................................................... 22
Selecting I/O Modules for the IOX ................................................. 25
Configuring I/O Modules for the IOX ............................................. 27
Configuring I/O Modules for the IOC ............................................. 28
Setting Up Passwords ......................................................................... 31
Advanced Setup Features ................................................................... 32
Creating Custom Quantities to be Displayed................................. 32
Creating Custom Screens ............................................................. 35
Viewing Custom Screens .............................................................. 39
Advanced Meter Setup .................................................................. 39
Resetting Min/Max, Demand, and Energy Values .................................... 41
Viewing Metered Data from the Meters Menu ..................................... 43
Viewing Minimum and Maximum Values from the Min/Max Menu ...... 43
Viewing Active Alarms ......................................................................... 46
Viewing and Acknowledging High Priority Alarms ............................... 46
Reading and Writing Registers ................................................................. 48
Performing a Wiring Error Test ................................................................. 49
Running the Diagnostics Wiring Error Test ......................................... 50
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
i
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 4: METERING CAPABILITIES
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Min/Max Values for Real-Time Readings .................................................. 56
Power Factor Min/Max Conventions .................................................... 57
Demand Power Calculation Methods .................................................. 59
Block Interval Demand................................................................... 60
Synchronized Demand................................................................... 62
Demand Current .................................................................................. 62
Demand Voltage .................................................................................. 62
Thermal Demand ................................................................................. 63
Predicted Demand ............................................................................... 63
Generic Demand ................................................................................. 64
Input Metering Demand ....................................................................... 65
Demand Synch Pulse Input ....................................................................... 72
Analog Input Example ......................................................................... 74
Relay Output Operating Modes ................................................................. 75
Mechanical Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 77
Setpoint-Controlled Relay Functions ................................................... 78
Solid-State KYZ Pulse Output ................................................................... 78
Calculating the Kilowatthour-Per-Pulse Value .......................................... 80
Analog Output Example ....................................................................... 82
Setpoint-Driven Alarms ........................................................................ 84
Setpoint-Controlled Relay Functions ......................................................... 86
Types of Setpoint-Controlled Relay Functions .................................... 87
Alarm Conditions and Alarm Numbers ...................................................... 91
Using Waveshape Alarms ................................................................... 99
Alarm Log Storage ............................................................................. 101
Alarm-Driven Data Log Entries .......................................................... 102
Organizing Data Log Files ................................................................. 102
Data Log Storage .............................................................................. 102
ii
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 9: DISTURBANCE MONITORING
Interval Min/Max/Average Log ........................................................... 103
Interval Min/Max/Average Log Storage ....................................... 104
Types of Waveform Captures ................................................................. 107
Steady-State Waveform Capture ...................................................... 107
Initiating a Steady-state Waveform.............................................. 107
Disturbance Waveform Capture ........................................................ 107
Adaptive Waveform Capture ............................................................. 108
100ms rms Event Recording ................................................................... 108
Cycle-by-Cycle RMS Event Recording ................................................... 109
Setting Up Cycle-by-Cycle RMS Event Recording ............................ 109
Configuring the Alarms ...................................................................... 110
Setting Up the Circuit Monitor for Automatic Event Capture ................... 111
Setting Up Alarm-Triggered Event Capture ....................................... 111
Setting Up Input-Triggered Event Capture ........................................ 111
How the Circuit Monitor Captures an Event ............................................ 112
About Disturbance Monitoring ................................................................. 113
Capabilities of the Circuit Monitor During an Event ................................ 115
Using the Circuit Monitor with SMS to Perform Disturbance Monitoring . 116
Understanding the Alarm Log ................................................................. 117
Using EN50160 Evaluation ..................................................................... 119
How Results of the Evaluations Are Reported .................................. 119
Possible Configurations Through Register Writes ............................. 120
Evaluation of Abnormal Events ................................................... 120
Detecting Transient Overvoltages ..................................................... 123
Circuit Monitor Operation with EN50160 Enabled ............................. 123
Resetting Statistics ...................................................................... 123
Standard Alarms Allocated for Evaluations ................................. 123
Flicker Monitoring ........................................................................ 124
Harmonic Calculations................................................................. 124
Time Intervals .............................................................................. 124
EN50160 Evaluation of Meter Data ................................................... 124
Power Frequency ........................................................................ 124
Supply Voltage Variations ........................................................... 124
Flicker Severity ............................................................................ 124
Supply Voltage Unbalance .......................................................... 125
Harmonic Voltage ........................................................................ 125
System Configuration and Status Registers ...................................... 125
Evaluation Data Available Over a Communications Link .................. 127
Portal Registers ........................................................................... 127
Viewing EN50160 Evaluations Web Pages ....................................... 130
Setting Up EN50160 Evaluation ........................................................ 130
Enabling the EN50160 Evaluation ............................................... 131
Selecting Nominal Voltage .......................................................... 131
Selecting IEC61000 Mode (CM4250 only) .................................. 132
Selecting Flicker (CM4000T only) ............................................... 132
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
iii
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Table of Contents
APPENDIX C: ABBREVIATED REGISTER
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Circuit Monitor Maintenance ................................................................... 135
Upgrading Memory in the Circuit Monitor .......................................... 136
Identifying the Firmware Version ............................................................. 137
Viewing the Display in Different Languages ............................................ 137
Calibration of the Current/Voltage Module .............................................. 137
Transient Circuit Monitor Description ...................................................... 141
Impulsive Transient Alarms ..................................................................... 142
Configuring a Transient Alarm ........................................................... 142
Recording and Analyzing Data .......................................................... 142
Creating an Impulsive Transient Alarm ............................................. 143
Setting Up and Editing Transient Alarms ........................................... 146
Impulsive Transient Logging ................................................................... 149
Transient Analysis Information .......................................................... 149
Writing Transient Register Values ..................................................... 150
Transient Waveform Captures ................................................................ 151
Transient Waveform Capture Example ............................................. 152
Minimum Requirements ..................................................................... 153
How the Circuit Monitor Handles Flicker ........................................... 153
Setting Up Flicker from the Display ................................................... 154
Viewing Flicker Readings .................................................................. 155
Viewing Flicker Data Web Pages ...................................................... 155
Overview of the Command Interface ....................................................... 157
Issuing Commands ............................................................................ 158
Operating Outputs from the Command Interface .................................... 162
Using the Command Interface to Change Configuration Registers ........ 162
Command Interface Control .............................................................. 163
Using Incremental Energy ................................................................. 164
Setting Up Individual Harmonic Calculations .......................................... 165
CM4000T Specifications ......................................................................... 170
How Power Factor is Stored in the Register ........................................... 178
How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers .......................................... 178
How Energy Values Are Stored in Registers .......................................... 179
Abbreviated Register Listing ................................................................... 180
................................................................................................................. 217
.................................................................................................................. 223
iv
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CHAPTER 1—INTRODUCTION
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 1—Introduction
CIRCUIT MONITOR DESCRIPTION
The circuit monitor is a multifunction, digital instrumentation, data acquisition and control device. It can replace a variety of meters, transducers, and other components. The circuit monitor can be located at the service entrance to monitor the cost and quality of power, and it can be used to evaluate the utility service. When located at equipment mains, the circuit monitor can detect voltage-based disturbances that cause costly equipment downtime. Features in the meter also help users troubleshoot the source and location of these disturbances.
The circuit monitor is equipped with
RS-485
and
RS-232 communications for integration into any power monitoring and control system. However, the
Powerlogic
®
System Manager™ Software (
SMS
), written specifically for power monitoring and control, best supports the circuit monitor’s advanced features.
The circuit monitor is a true rms meter capable of exceptionally accurate measurement of highly nonlinear loads. A sophisticated sampling technique enables accurate, true rms measurement through the 255th harmonic. Over
50 metered values plus extensive minimum and maximum data can be
viewed on the display or remotely using software. Table 1–1 summarizes
the readings available from the circuit monitor.
Table 1–1: Summary of Circuit Monitor Instrumentation
Real-Time Readings
• Current (per phase, N, G, 3-Phase)
• Voltage (L–L, L–N, N–G, 3-Phase)
• Real Power (per phase, 3-Phase
)
• Reactive Power (per phase, 3-Phase
)
• Apparent Power (per phase, 3-Phase
)
• Power Factor (per phase, 3-Phase
)
• Frequency
• Temperature (internal ambient)
• THD (current and voltage)
• K-Factor (per phase)
Demand Readings
• Demand Current (per phase present, 3-Phase average)
• Demand Voltage (per phase present, 3-Phase average)
• Average Power Factor (3-Phase total)
• Demand Real Power (per phase present, peak)
• Demand Reactive Power (per phase present, peak)
• Demand Apparent Power (per phase present, peak)
• Coincident Readings
• Predicted Power Demand
Energy Readings
• Accumulated Energy, Real
• Accumulated Energy, Reactive
• Accumulated Energy, Apparent
• Bidirectional Readings
• Reactive Energy by Quadrant
• Incremental Energy
• Conditional Energy
Power Analysis Values
• Crest Factor (per phase)
• Displacement Power Factor (per phase, 3-Phase
)
• Fundamental Voltages (per phase)
• Fundamental Currents (per phase)
• Fundamental Real Power (per phase)
• Fundamental Reactive Power (per phase)
• Harmonic Power
• Unbalance (current and voltage)
• Phase Rotation
• Harmonic Magnitudes and Angles (per phase)
• Sequence Components
Accessories and Options for the Circuit
Monitor
The circuit monitor has a modular design to maximize its usability. In addition to the main meter, the circuit monitor has plug-on modules and accessories, including:
•
Current/voltage module. A standard part of the circuit monitor is the current/voltage module where all metering data acquisition occurs. The circuit monitor is calibrated at the factory at the time of manufacture and
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
1
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 1—Introduction
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
does not normally need to be recalibrated. However, in special cases where annual calibration is specified by the user, the current/voltage module can be removed and sent to the factory for recalibration without removing the entire circuit monitor. See “Replacing the Current/Voltage
Module” in the PowerLogic
®
Circuit Monitor: Series 4000
Installation Manual for instructions on replacing the current/voltage module.
•
Current/voltage transient module (CVMT). A standard part of the
CM4000T and an optional accessory for the CM4000 and CM4250. See
“Section 11—Transient Circuit Monitor” in the PowerLogic
®
Circuit
Monitor: Series 4000 Reference Manual for more information about the CM4000T.
•
Remote display. The optional remote 4-line display is available with a back-lit liquid crystal display (LCD) or a vacuum fluorescent display
(VFD). The VFD model includes an infrared port that can be used to communicate directly with the circuit monitor from a laptop computer.
The VFD model can also be used to download firmware, keeping the circuit monitor up to date with the latest system enhancements.
•
I/O Extender. The I/O extender can be attached to the circuit monitor to allow “plug in” capabilities for up to 8 industry-standard inputs and outputs. Several pre-configured combinations are available, or you can create a custom configuration.
•
Digital I /O Card. The I/O capabilities of the circuit monitor can be further expanded by adding a digital I/O card (4 inputs and 4 outputs).
This card fits into the option slot on the top of the circuit monitor.
•
Ethernet Communications Card. The Ethernet communications card provides an Ethernet port that accepts a 100 Mbps fiber optic cable or a
10/100 Mbps UTP and provides an RS-485 master port to extend the circuit monitor communications options. This card is easily installed into the option slot on the top of the circuit monitor.
Table 1–2 lists the circuit monitor parts and accessories and their
associated instruction bulletins.
Table 1–2: Circuit Monitor Parts, Accessories, and Custom Cables
Description
Circuit Monitor
Current/Voltage Module with anti-aliasing
Circuit Monitor Transient
Current/Voltage Mudule Transient
VFD Display with infrared (IR) port and proximity sensor
LCD Display
Optical Communications Interface (for use with the VFD display only)
I/O Extender Module
➀ with no preinstalled I/ Os, accepts up to 8 individual I/O modules with a maximum of 4 analog I/Os with 4 digital inputs (32 Vdc), 2 digital outputs (60 Vdc),
1 analog output (4–20 mA), and 1 analog input (0–5 Vdc) with 4 analog inputs (4–20 mA) and 4 digital inputs (120 Vac/Vdc)
➀
For parts list of individual inputs and outputs, see Table 5–1 in the reference manual.
Part Number
CM4250
CM4250MG
CVM42
CM4000T
CM4000TMG
CVMT
CMDVF
CMDVFMG
CMDLC
CMDLCMG
OCIVF
IOX
IOX2411
IOX0404
2
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 1—Introduction
Table 1–2:
Circuit Monitor Parts, Accessories, and Custom Cables (continued)
Description
with 8 digital inputs (120 Vac/Vdc)
Digital I/O Card
Field installable with 4 digital inputs (120 Vac), 3 (10 A) relay outputs (20-138 Vac/Vdc), 1 pulse output (KYZ)
Ethernet Communications Card with
100 Mbps fiber or 10/100 Mbps UTP Ethernet port and 1 RS-485 master port
Memory Expansion Kit (32 MB kit)
CM4 Mounting Adapters
4-ft display cable (1.2 m)
12-ft display cable (3.6 m)
30-ft display cable (9.1 m)
10-ft RS-232 cable (3 m)
➀
For parts list of individual inputs and outputs, see Table 5–1 in the reference manual.
Features
Part Number
IOX08
IOC44
ECC21
CM4MEM32M
CM4MA
CAB-4
CAB-12
CAB-30
CAB-106
Some of the circuit monitor’s many features include:
•
True rms metering up to the 255th harmonic
•
Accepts standard CT and PT inputs
•
690 volt direct connection on metering inputs for CM4250, CM4000T
600 volt direct connection on metering inputs for CM4000
•
Certified ANSI C12.20 revenue accuracy, IEC 687 Class 0.2S revenue accuracy
IEC 62053-22 Class 0.2 for CM4250, CM4000T
•
High accuracy—0.04% current and voltage
•
Min/max readings of metered data
•
Power quality analysis readings—THD, K-factor, crest factor
•
Anti-aliasing filtering
•
Real-time harmonic magnitudes and angles to the 63rd harmonic
•
Current and voltage sag/swell detection and recording
•
Downloadable firmware
•
Easy setup through the optional remote display (password protected), where you can view metered values.
•
Setpoint-controlled alarm and relay functions
•
Onboard alarm and data logging
•
Wide operating temperature range –25° to 70°C
•
Modular, field-installable digital and analog I/O modules
•
Flexible communications—RS-485 and RS-232 communications are standard, optional Ethernet communications card available with fiberoptic connection
•
Two option card slots for field-installable I/O and Ethernet capabilities
•
Standard 16 MB onboard logging memory (field upgradable to 32 MB and higher)
•
CT and PT wiring diagnostics
•
Revenue security with utility sealing capability
•
Disturbance direction detection
•
EN50160 evaluations
•
Power quality, energy, and alarm summaries
•
Waveshape alarms
•
Alarm setpoint learning
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
3
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 1—Introduction
TOPICS NOT COVERED IN THIS
BULLETIN
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
•
Harmonic power flows
•
Harmonic and interharmonic measurements per IEC 61000-4-7
(CM4250 only)
Some of the circuit monitor’s advanced features, such as onboard data logs and alarm log files, can only be set up over the communications link using
SMS . This circuit monitor instruction bulletin describes many advanced features, but does not tell how to set them up. For instructions on using
SMS
, refer to the
SMS
online help and the SMS Setup Guide. For
information about related instruction bulletins, see Table 1–2 on page 2.
4
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CHAPTER 2—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Refernece Manual
Chapter 2—Safety Precautions
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
This section contains important safety precautions that must be followed before attempting to install, service, or maintain electrical equipment.
Carefully read and follow the safety precautions outlined below.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices. In the U.S., see NFPA 70E.
• Only qualified workers should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay particular attention to the design of the power system.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
• Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment, and carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left inside the equipment.
• Use caution while removing or installing panels so that they do not extend into the energized bus; avoid handling the panels, which could cause personal injury.
• The successful operation of this equipment depends upon proper handling, installation, and operation. Neglecting fundamental installation requirements may lead to personal injury as well as damage to electrical equipment or other property.
• Before performing Dielectric (Hi-Pot) or Megger testing on any equipment in which the circuit monitor is installed, disconnect all input and output wires to the circuit monitor. High voltage testing may damage electronic components contained in the circuit monitor.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
5
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Refernece Manual
Chapter 2—Safety Precautions
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
6
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CHAPTER 3—OPERATION
OPERATING THE DISPLAY
VIEWING THE SCREEN
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
This section describes how to set up the circuit monitor from the display only. Some advanced features, such as configuring the onboard logs of the circuit monitor, must be set up over the communications link using SMS .
Refer to the
SMS
instruction bulletin and online help file for instructions on setting up advanced features not accessible from the display.
Figure 3–1 gives examples of the display screen. The display shows four
lines of information at a time. Notice the arrow on the left of the display screen. This arrow indicates that you can scroll up or down to view more information. For example, on the Main Menu you can view the Resets,
Setup, and Diagnostics menu options only if you scroll down to display them. When at the top of a list, the arrow moves to the top line. When the last line of information is displayed, the arrow moves to the bottom as
illustrated on the right in Figure 3–1.
Figure 3–1: Arrow on the display screen
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
View Alarms
MAIN MENU
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
How the Buttons Work
The buttons on the display let you scroll through options and select
information, move from menu to menu, and adjust the contrast. Figure 3–2
shows the buttons.
Figure 3–2: Display buttons
Arrow buttons
Menu button
Enter button
Contrast button
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
7
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Display Menu Conventions
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The buttons are used in the following way:
•
Arrow buttons. Press the arrow buttons to scroll up and down the options on a menu. Also, when a value can be changed, use the arrow buttons to scroll through the values that are available. If the value is a number, holding the arrow button down increases the speed in which the numbers increase or decrease.
•
Menu button. Press the menu button to move back one menu level. The menu button also prompts you to save if you’ve made changes to any options within that menu structure. (Press Enter to save.)
•
Enter button. Press the enter button to select an option on a menu or to select a value to be edited.
•
Contrast button. Press the contrast button to darken or lighten the display. On the LCD model, press any button once to activate the back light.
This section explains a few conventions that were developed to streamline
instructions in this chapter. Figure 3–3 shows the parts of a menu.
Figure 3–3: Parts of a menu
Selecting a Menu Option
Changing a Value
8
Menu
Menu Option
DISPLAY
Language English
Date MM/DD/YYYY
Time Format 2400hr
VFD Sensitivity 3
Display Timer 1 Min
Custom Quantity
Custom Screen
Value
Each time you read “select” in this manual, choose the option from the menu by doing this:
1. Press the arrows to highlight the menu option.
2. Press the enter button to select that option.
To change a value, the procedure is the same on every menu:
1. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change.
2. Press the enter button blink.
to select the value. The value begins to
3. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the possible values. To select the new value, press the enter button.
4. Press the arrow buttons to move up and down the menu options. You can change one value or all of the values on a menu. To save the changes, press the menu button until the circuit monitor displays:
“Save changes? No”
NOTE: Pressing the menu button while a value is blinking will return that value to its most current setting.
5. Press the arrow to change to “Yes,” then press the enter button to save the changes.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Cycling Screens on the Display
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
You can set up your display to cycle through summary screens as well as any custom screens. You can set this interval for cycling anywhere from one second to 60 seconds. Setting the interval to zero disables cycling. If the display is set to cycle through screens, it begins doing so after four minutes have passed and you have not pressed any keys. It continues cycling until you press a key. To activate this feature, set the interval for cycling in
register 3603. See “Using the Command Interface to Change Configuration
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
9
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
MAIN MENU OVERVIEW
Figure 3–4: Menu Options—Main Menu
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
CMPL
METERS
Summary
Power
Energy
Custom*
MIN / MAX
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Power
thd
VIEW ALARMS
Active Alarms List
High Priority Log
I/O DISPLAY
RESETS
Energy
Demand
Min/Max
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The Main Menu on the display lists the menu options that you use to set up and control the circuit monitor and its accessories and to view metered data
and alarms. Figure 3–4 shows the Main Menu options with additional
selections under each option. Main menu options include the following:
•
Meters—Lets you view metered values that provide information about power usage and power quality.
•
Min/Max—Lets you view the minimum and maximum metered values since the last reset of the min/max values with their associated dates and times.
•
View Alarms—Lets you view a list of all active alarms, regardless of the priority. In addition, you can view a log of high priority alarms, which contains the ten most recent high priority alarms.
•
I/O Display—Lets you view the designation and status of each input or output. This menu displays the I/Os present, so you will see only the available menu items for the I/O modules installed.
•
Resets—Lets you reset energy, peak demand, and minimum/maximum values.
•
Setup—Lets you define the settings for the display, such as selecting the date format to be displayed. Creating custom quantities and custom screens are also options on this menu. In addition, use this menu to set up the circuit monitor parameters such as the CT and PT ratios. The
Setup menu is also where you define the communications, alarms, I/Os, and passwords.
•
Diagnostics—Lets you initiate the wiring error test. Also, use this menu to read and write registers and view information about the circuit monitor, such as its firmware version and serial number.
•
CMPL. CMPL is the custom programming language for the circuit monitor. If a custom program is installed, you can view the name, version, date, and status of the program.
SETUP
Date Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
CMPL
DIAGNOSTICS
CMPL
*Only if custom screen has been defined by user.
10
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CONFIGURING THE CIRCUIT MONITOR
USING THE SETUP MENU
Setting Up the Display
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Before you can access the Setup menu from the Main Menu, you must enter the Setup password. The default password is 0. To change the
password, see “Setting Up Passwords” on page 31. The Setup menu has
the following options:
•
Date & Time
•
Display
•
Communications
•
Meter
•
Alarm
•
I/O
•
Passwords
Each of these options is described in the sections that follow.
Setting up the display involves, for example, choosing a date and time format that you want to be displayed. To set up the display, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Display.
When prompted for a password, press the arrow buttons to enter the
password (default is 0) and then press the enter button. (See “Setting Up
Passwords” on page 31 for more information.)
The Display Setup menu displays. Table 3–1 describes the options on
this menu.
DISPLAY
Language
Date
English
MM/DD/YYYY
Time Format AM/PM
VFD Sensitivity 2
Display Timer 5 Min
Custom Quantity
Custom Screen
2. Press the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change.
3. Press the enter button to select the value.The value begins to blink.
Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the available values. Then, press the enter button to select the new value.
4. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the other options on the menu, or if you are finished, press the menu button to save.
Table 3–1: Factory Defaults for the Display Settings
Option
Language
Date
Available Values
English
Francais
Espanol
Polski
Italiano
MM/DD/YYYY
YYYY/MM/DD
DD/MM/YYYY
Selection Description
Language used by the display.
Default
English
(Languages other than English require a language library file.)
Data format for all date-related values of the circuit monitor.
MM/DD/YYYY
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
11
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 3–1:
Factory Defaults for the Display Settings (continued)
Time Format
VFD Sensitivity
Display Timer
Custom Quantity
Custom Screen
2400hr
AM/PM
Off
1 = 0–6 ft (0–15 m)
2 = 0–12 ft (0–31 m)
3 = 0–20 ft (0–51 m)
Time format can be 24-hour military time or 12-hour clock with AM and PM.
Sensitivity value for the proximity sensor (for the
VFD display only).
2400hr
2
1, 5, 10, or 15 minutes Number of minutes the display remains illuminated after inactivity.
5
Creating custom quantities is an advanced feature that is not required for basic setup. To learn more about this
feature, see “Creating Custom Quantities to be Displayed” on page 32.
Creating custom screens is an advanced feature that is not required for basic setup. To learn more about this
feature, see “Creating Custom Screens” on page 35.
Setting Up the Communications
Setting the Device Address
RS-485, RS-232, and Infrared Port
Communications Setup
The Communications menu lets you set up the following communications:
•
RS-485 communications for daisy-chain communication of the circuit monitor and other
RS-485
devices.
•
RS-232 communications for point-to-point communication between the the circuit monitor and a host device, such as a
PC
or modem.
•
Infrared Port communications between the circuit monitor and a laptop computer (available only on the
VFD
display).
•
Ethernet Options for Ethernet communications between the circuit monitor and your Ethernet network when an Ethernet Communications
Card (
ECC
) is present.
Each of these options is described in the sections that follow.
Each PowerLogic device on a communications link must have a unique device address. The term communications link refers to 1–32 PowerLogic compatible devices daisy-chained to a single communications port. If the communications link has only a single device, assign it address 1. By networking groups of devices, PowerLogic systems can support a virtually unlimited number of devices.
To set up
RS-485
,
RS-232
, or the infrared port communications, set the address, baud rate, and parity. Follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Communications.
The Communications Setup screen displays.
12
COMMUNICATIONS
RS-485
RS-232
Infrared Port
Ethernet Option
NOTE: You can set up infrared communications only if the circuit monitor is equipped with a VFD display. Also, you can set up Ethernet communications only if the circuit monitor is equipped with an ECC card.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
2. From the Communications Setup menu, select the type of communications that you are using. Depending on what you select, the
screen displays as shown below. Table 3–2 describes the options on
this menu.
RS-485
Protocol
Address
Baud Rate
Modbus
1
9600
Parity
Mode
Even
Slave
Timeout(sec) 2
Redirect Disabled
RS-232
Protocol
Address
Baud Rate
Modbus
1
9600
Parity
Mode
Even
Slave
Timeout(sec)
Redirect
2
Disabled
INFRARED PORT
Protocol
Address
Baud Rate
Parity
Redirect
Modbus
1
9600
Even
Disabled
ETHERNET
IP 157.198.216. 83
Sub 255.255.255. 0
Rtr 157.198.216. 10
Port Type 10T/100TX
3. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change.
4. Press the enter button to select the value.The value begins to blink. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the available values. Then, press the enter button to select the new value.
5. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the other options on the menu; or if you are finished, press the menu button to save.
Table 3–2: Options for Communications Setup
Option
Protocol
Available Values Selection Description
MODBUS
JBUS
Select MODBUS or JBUS protocol.
Address 1–255
Baud
Rate
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
Device address of the circuit monitor.
See “Setting the Device Address” on page 12 for requirements of device
addressing.
Speed at which the devices will communicate. The baud rate must match all devices on the communications link.
Parity
Mode
Even, Odd, or
None
Master
Slave
Timeout 2-10
Redirect Disabled
To RS-232
To Subnet
Parity at which the circuit monitor will communicate.
Operating mode of the Communications port.
Default
MODBUS
1
9600
Even
Slave
Timeout of communications transaction in seconds.
2
Redirection options. See “Redirecting the Port” below.
Disables
Ethernet Communications Card (ECC) Setup Ethernet communications is available only if you have an optional Ethernet
Communications Card ( ECC ) that fits into slot A on the top of the circuit monitor. See the section on “Option Cards” in the PowerLogic Circuit
Monitor Series 4000 installation manual for more information. To set up the
Ethernet communications between the circuit monitor and the network, refer to the instruction bulletin provided with the ECC .
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
13
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Redirecting the Port
Redirecting the IR Port to the ECC Subnet
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The port redirect feature lets you communicate to devices on a subnetwork through the infrared (IR) port of the display or the RS-232 port of your circuit monitor. You can redirect the following ports:
•
Redirect the RS-232 or IR port to the RS-485.
•
Redirect RS-232 or IR port to the ECC RS-485 subnetwork.
This feature can be especially useful for communication to non-Modbus devices on a mixed-mode daisy chain connected to the circuit monitor. For example, if your circuit monitor is equipped with an ECC21 (Ethernet
Communications Card), you can use this feature to communicate to non-
Modbus devices such as a Series 2000 Circuit Monitor on a subnetwork.
Redirecting the IR port to the ECC lets you communicate from your PC to
devices on the ECC RS-485 subnet through the IR port as shown in Figure
3–5. You’ll need the Optical Communication Interface (OCIVF) to
communicate through the IR port. This configuration is useful in larger systems.
To redirect the IR port, select Setup > Communications > Infrared Port>
Redirect to Subnet. Save your changes.
Figure 3–5: Redirected IR port to the ECC RS-485 subnet
Other non-Modbus
Device
PowerLogic Modbus
Device Device
E
C
C
Display
14
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Redirecting the RS-232 Port to the ECC Subnet
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Redirecting the RS-232 to the RS-485 port of the ECC lets you communicate from your PC directly to the ECC RS-485 subnet as shown in
Figure 3–6. This configuration is useful in larger systems.
To redirect the RS-232 port, select Setup > Communications > RS-232 >
Redirect to Subnet. Save your changes.
Figure 3–6: Redirected RS-232 port to the ECC RS-485 subnet
E
C
C
R S -2 3 2
Other non-Mod bus
Device
PowerLogic Mod bus
Device Device
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
15
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Redirecting the RS-232 to the RS-485 Port
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Redirecting the RS-232 to the RS-485 lets you communicate directly from your PC to any device on the RS-485 daisy chain as illustrated in
Figure 3–7. This configuration provides the benefit of a built-in RS-232 to
RS-485 converter and is convenient for use in smaller systems.
Figure 3–7: Redirected RS-232 port to the RS-485 port
RS-485
Modbus / Jbus Devices
RS-232
Follow these steps:
1. Set the RS-485 port to “Master” before redirecting the RS-232 to the
RS-485 port. From the Main Menu of the display, select Setup >
Communications > RS-485 > Mode > Master.
NOTE: If the RS-485 port is not set to Master, the circuit monitor will disable the redirect of the RS-232 port.
2. To redirect the RS-232 port, from the Communications menu, select >
RS-232 > Redirect to RS-485. Save your changes.
16
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Redirecting the IR Port of the Display to the
RS-485
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Redirecting the IR port of the display to the RS-485 port lets you communicate from your PC to devices on the RS-485 daisy chain, without having a direct PC to RS-485 connection. You’ll need the Optical
Communication Interface (OCIVF) to communicate through the IR port.
Figure 3–8 illustrates this connection. This configuration is useful in smaller
systems.
Follow these steps:
1. Set the RS-485 port to “Master” before redirecting the IR port to the
RS-485 port. From the Main Menu of the display, select Setup >
Communications > RS-485 > Mode > Master.
NOTE: If the RS-485 port is not set to Master, the circuit monitor will disable the redirect of the RS-232 port.
2. To redirect the IR port, from the Communications menu, select
Infrared Port> Redirect> to RS-485. Save your changes.
Figure 3–8: Redirected IR port to the RS-485
Modbus / Jbus Devices
RS-485
Display
RS-232
Setting Up the Metering Functions of the
Circuit Monitor
To set up the metering within the circuit monitor, you must configure the following items on the Meter setup screen for basic setup:
•
CT and PT ratios
•
System type
•
Frequency
The power demand method, interval and subinterval, and advanced setup options are also accessible from the Meter Setup menu, but are not required
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
17
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
for basic setup if you are accepting the factory defaults already defined in the circuit monitor. Follow these steps to set up the circuit monitor:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Meter.
The Meter setup screen displays. Table 3–3 describes the options on this
menu.
METER
Ø CT Primary
Ø CT Secondary
N CT Primary
N CT Secondary
PT Pri Scale
PT Primary x1
120
PT Secondary
Sys Type
120
3Ø4W3CT
5
5
5
5
Frequency (Hz) 60
Pwr Dmd Meth Slide
Pwr Dmd Int
Pwr Dmd Sub Int
15
1
Power Quality
Advanced
Required for basic setup
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change.
3. Press the enter button to select the value. The value begins to blink. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the available values. Then, press the enter button to select the new value.
4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the other options on the menu, or if you are finished, press the menu button to save.
Table 3–3: Options for Meter Setup
Option
CT Primary
CT Secondary
PT Pri Scale
PT Primary
PT Secondary
Sys Type
Frequency (Hz)
Available Values Selection Description
1–32,767 Set the rating for the CT primary. The circuit monitor supports two primary CT ratings: one for the phase CTs and the other for the neutral CT.
1 or 5 x1 x10 x100
No PT
1–32,767
Set the rating for the CT secondaries.
Set the value to which the PT Primary is to be scaled if the PT Primary is larger than 32,767. For example, setting the scale to x10 multiplies the PT Primary number by 10.
For a direct-connect installation, select “No PT.”
100
110
115
120
3
3
3
3
3
3
Φ
Φ
Φ
Φ
Φ
Φ
3W2CT
3W3CT
4W3CT
4W4CT
4W3CT2PT
4W4CT2PT
Set the rating for the PT primary.
Set the rating for the PT secondaries.
3
Φ
3W2CT is system type 30
3
Φ
3W3CT is system type 31
3
Φ
4W3CT is system type 40
3
Φ
4W4CT is system type 41
3
Φ
4W3CT2PT is system type 42
3
Φ
4W4CT2PT is system type 43
Set the system type. A system type code is assigned to each type of system connection. See Table 5–2 in the installation manual for a description of system connection types.
50, 60, or 400 Hz Frequency of the system.
Default
5
5 x1
120
120
3
Φ
4W3CT (40)
60
18
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Table 3–3:
Options for Meter Setup (continued)
Pwr Dmd Meth
Pwr Dmd Int
Select the power demand calculation method. The circuit monitor supports several methods to calculate
average demand of real power. See “Demand Power Calculation Methods” on page 59 for a detailed
description.
Slide—Sliding Block Demand
Slave—Slave Block Demand
Therm—Thermal Demand
RComms—Command-Synchronized Rolling Block Demand
Comms—Command-Synchronized Block Demand
RInput—Input-Synchronized Rolling Block Demand
Input—Input-Synchronized Block Demand
RClock—Clock-Synchronized Rolling Block Demand
Clock—Clock-Synchronized Block Demand
RBlock—Rolling Block Demand
Block—Fixed Block Demand
IncEngy—Synch to Incremental Energy Interval
Slide
1–60
Pwr Dmd Sub Interval 1–60
Power demand interval—set the time in minutes in which the circuit monitor calculates the demand.
15
Power demand subinterval—period of time within the demand interval in which the demand calculation is updated. Set the subinterval only for methods that will accept a subinterval. The subinterval must be evenly divisible into the interval.
N/A
Power Quality
Advanced
See “Using EN50160 Evaluation” on page 119 for more information.
See “Advanced Meter Setup” on page 39 in this chapter for more information.
Setting Up Alarms
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
This section describes how to set up alarms and create your own custom
alarms. For a detailed description of alarm capabilities, see Alarms on page
83. The circuit monitor can detect over 100 alarm conditions, such as
over/under conditions, status input changes, and phase unbalance conditions. Some alarms are preconfigured and enabled at the factory. See
“Factory Defaults” in the installation manual for information about preconfigured alarms. You can edit the parameters of any preconfigured alarm from the display.
For each alarm that you set up, do the following:
•
Select the alarm group that defines the type of alarm:
— Standard speed alarms have a detection rate of one second and are useful for detecting conditions such as over current and under voltage. Up to 80 alarms can be set up in this group.
— High speed alarms have a detection rate of 100 milliseconds and are useful for detecting voltage sags and swells that last a few cycles.
Up to 20 alarms can be set up in this group.
— Disturbance monitoring alarms have a detection rate of one cycle and are useful for detecting voltage sags and swells. Up to 20 alarms can be set up in this group.
— Digital alarms are triggered by an exception such as the transition of a status input or the end of an incremental energy interval. Up to 40 alarms can be set up in this group.
— Boolean alarms have a detection rate of the alarms used as inputs.
They are used to combine specific alarms into summary alarm information. Up to 15 alarms can be set up in this group.
— Transient alarms are set up using the CM4000T. They detect and capture high-speed impulsive transients.
— Waveshape alarms compare present and previous waveforms to identify changes too small to be detected by a disturbance alarm. Up to 4 alarms can be set up in this group.
19
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Setpoint Learning
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
•
Select the alarm that you want to configure. Keep the default name or enter a new name with up to 15 characters.
•
Enable the alarm.
•
Assign a priority to the alarm. Refer to “Viewing Alarms” on page 45 for
information about the alarm priority levels.
•
Define any required pickup and dropout setpoints, and pickup and dropout time delays (for standard, high speed, and disturbance alarm
groups only, refer to “Setpoint-Driven Alarms” on page 84).
The circuit monitor can learn normal operating ranges for specified alarm quantities and optimize alarm setpoints for these quantities. This process is called "setpoint learning." You determine the quantity to be learned and the period of time for the learning process. The learning period should take place during "normal" operation. Setpoint learning is available for standardspeed and high-speed analog alarms, disturbance alarms, and waveshape alarms.
Several configuration options allow you to customize setpoint learning to suit your application:
Options that apply to individual alarms in a learning period are:
•
Enable/disable. The normal alarms (standard, high-speed, and disturbance) may be enabled or disabled during the learning period.
Waveshape alarms must be enabled to learn.
•
Setpoint type while learning. If an alarm is enabled while learning, the setpoints used by that alarm can be "fixed" or "dynamic." Alarms with fixed setpoints use setpoints that you configure; they are not updated during learning. Alarms with dynamic setpoints use the present value of the learned setpoints, updated at an interval you select (from 1 to 60 minutes).
Options that apply to all alarms in a learning period are:
•
Action when finished learning
•
Duration of learning period
•
Stop learning if no setpoint change after
•
Deadband percentage
•
Interval to update dynamic setpoints
Learning is complete when one of the following two time periods has expired:
•
Duration of learning period
•
Stop earning if no setpoint change after
Notes:
•
A learning period can include several quantities. The period is not complete until learning is complete for all quantities selected for learning.
•
If you add an alarm to a learning period, the elapsed time for that learning period is reset.
20
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Creating a New Custom Alarm
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
In addition to editing an alarm, you can also create new custom alarms by performing these steps:
1. Create the custom alarm.
2. Set up the new alarm.
3. Enable the new alarm.
The recommended sequence is to set up the alarm and save the settings while the alarm is disabled. Then, go back into setup to enable the alarm.
To use custom alarms, you must first create a custom alarm and then set up the alarm to be used by the circuit monitor. Creating an alarm defines information about the alarm including:
•
Alarm group (standard, high speed, disturbance, digital, or boolean)
•
Name of the alarm
•
Type (such as whether it alarms on an over or under condition)
•
Register number of the value that will be alarmed upon
To create an alarm, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Alarm > Create Custom.
The Create Custom screen displays.
CREATE CUSTOM
Standard 1 sec
High Speed 100ms
Disturbance < cycle
Digital
Boolean
Transient
Waveshape
2. Select the Alarm Group for the alarm that you are creating:
CM4000T only
— Standard—detection rate of 1 second
— High Speed—detection rate of 100 millisecond
— Disturbance—detection rate of less than 1 cycle
— Digital—triggered by an exception such as a status input or the end of an interval
— Boolean—triggered by condition of alarms used as inputs
— Transient—detection rate of less than 1 microsecond
— Waveshape—detection rate up to 32.5 microseconds
The Select Position screen displays and jumps to the first open position in the alarm list.
SELECT POSITION
*43 Over THD Vbc
*44 Over THD Vca
45
21
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
3. Select the position of the new alarm.
The Alarm Parameters screen displays.
ALARM PARAMETERS
Lbl: Over THD Vbc
Type Over Val
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 3–4 describes the options on this menu.
Table 3–4: Options for Creating an Alarm
Option
Lbl
Type
Selection Description Default
Label—name of the alarm. Press the down arrow button to scroll through the alphabet. The lower case letters are presented first, then uppercase, then numbers and symbols. Press the enter button to select a letter and move to the next character field. To move to the next option, press the menu button. Available values displayed in forward order are: space, a-z, A-Z, 9-0, #, $,
Φ
. If you use the up arrow button to scroll, these values are displayed in reverse order.
Select the type of alarm that you are creating.
Note: For digital alarms, the type is either ON state, OFF state, or Unary to describe the state of the digital input. Unary is available for digital alarms only.
*
Over Val—over value
Over Pwr—over power
Over Rev Pwr—over reverse power
Under Val—under value
Under Pwr—under power
Phs Rev—phase reversal
Phs Loss Volt—phase loss, voltage
Phs Loss Cur—phase loss, current
PF Lead—leading power factor
PF Lag—lagging power factor
See Table 6–4 on page 93 for a description of alarm types.
—
Undefined
Qty
For standard or high speed alarms, this is the quantity to be evaluated. While selected, press the arrow buttons to scroll through the quantity options: Current, Voltage, Demand, Unbalance, Frequency, Power Quality, THD, Harmonics,
Temperature, Custom, and Register. Pressing the menu key while an option is displayed will activate that option’s list of values. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the list of options, selecting an option by pressing the enter key.
Undefined
*
Unary is a special type of alarm used for ”end of” digital alarms. It does not apply to setting up alarms for digital inputs.
Setting Up and Editing Alarms
22
4. Press the menu button until “Save Changes? No” flashes on the display.
Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save the changes. Now, you are ready to set up the newly created custom alarm.
To set up any alarm—new or existing—for use by the circuit monitor, use the Edit Parameters option on the Alarm screen. You can also change parameters of any alarm, new or existing. For example, using the Edit
Parameters option, you can enable or disable an alarm, change its priority, and change its pickup and dropout setpoints.
Follow these instructions to set up or edit an alarm:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Alarm > Edit Parameters.
The Edit Parameters screen displays.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
EDIT PARAMETERS
Standard
High Speed
1 sec
100ms
Disturbance <1cycle
Digital
Boolean
Transient
Waveshape
2. Select the Alarm Group:
— Standard
— High Speed
— Disturbance
— Digital
— Boolean
— Transient
— Waveshape
The Select Alarm screen displays.
SELECT ALARM
*01 Over Ia
02 Over Ib
03 Over Ic
CM4000T only
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
NOTE: If you are setting up or editing a digital alarm, alarm names such as Breaker 1 trip, Breaker 1 reset will display instead.
3. Select the alarm you want to set up or edit.
The Edit Alarm screen with the alarm parameters displays. Table 3–5
describes the options on this menu.
EDIT ALARM
Lbl:Over Ia
Enable
Priority
Setpoint Mode
Pickup
PU Dly seconds
Dropout
DO Dly seconds
No
None
Abs
0
0
0
0
23
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
NOTE: If you are setting up or editing a digital alarm, fields related to pickup and dropout are not applicable and will not be displayed.
4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change, then edit the alarm options.
5. When you are finished with all changes, press the menu button until
“Save Changes? No” flashes on the display. Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save the changes.
NOTE: An asterisk next to the alarm in the alarm list indicates that the alarm is enabled.
Table 3–5: Options for Editing an Alarm
Option
Lbl
Enable
Priority
Setpoint Mode
Available Values Selection Description
Alphanumeric
Yes
No
Select Yes to make the alarm available for use by the circuit monitor. On preconfigured alarms, the alarm may already be enabled.
Select No to make the alarm function unavailable to the circuit monitor.
Default
Label—name of the alarm assigned to this position. Press the down arrow button to scroll through the alphabet. The lower case letters are presented first, then uppercase, then numbers and symbols. Press the enter button to select a letter and move to the next character field. To move to the next option, press the menu button.
Name of the alarm assigned to this position.
Depends on individual alarm.
None
Low
Med
High
Abs
Rel
Low is the lowest priority alarm. High is the highest priority alarm and also places the active alarm in the list of high priority alarms. To view this list from the Main
Menu, select Alarms > High Priority Alarms. For more information, see “Viewing
Selecting Abs indicates that the pickup and dropout setpoints are absolute values.
Rel indicates that the pickup and dropout setpoints are a percentage of a running average, the relative value, of the test value.
Depends on individual alarm.
Pickup
PU Dly
Seconds
Dropout
DO Dly
Seconds
1–32,767
Pickup Delay
1–32,767
1–32,767
Dropout Delay
1–32,767
When you enter a delay time, the number is multiples of time. For example, for standard speed the time is 2 for 2 seconds, 3 for 3 seconds, etc. For high speed alarms, 1 indicates a 100 ms delay, 2 indicates a 200 ms delay, and so forth. For
disturbance the time unit is 1 cycle. See “Setpoint-Driven Alarms” on page 84 for
an explanation of pickup and dropout setpoints.
Depends on individual alarm.
24
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Setting Up I/Os
Selecting I/O Modules for the IOX
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
If you install an I/O Extender (IOX), you must configure each I/O module that is attached.
To set up an I/O, you must do the following:
1. Install the I/O option module following the instructions provided with the product.
2. If using an IOX, use the display to select which IOX option is installed.
3. Use the display to configure each individual input and output. You can also use SMS to configure inputs and outputs.
NOTE: After selecting which IOX option is installed, you can’t configure the modules until you have saved the changes. After saving the changes, you then can configure the inputs and outputs.
NOTE: For a description of I/O options, see “Input/Output Capabilities” on
page 71. To view the status of an I/O, see “Viewing I/O Status” on page 47.
You need to know the position number of the I/O to set it up. See “I/O Point
Numbers” on page 160 to determine this number.
To set up an I/O, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
The password prompt displays.
2. Select your password. The default password is 0.
The Setup menu displays.
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
3. Select I/O.
The I/O Setup menu displays.
I/O
KYZ
I/O Extender
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
NOTE: Other option modules (Slot A or Slot B) display in the I/O menu if they are installed
25
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
4. Select the I/O option that you have installed.
The I/O Extender Setup menu displays.
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
I/O EXTENDER SETUP
Select Modules
Configure Modules
5. Select the Select Modules menu option.
The IOX Select Modules menu displays.
IOX SELECT MODULES
IOX-08
IOX-0404
IOX-2411
Custom
6. If you have the IOX-08, IOX-0404, or IOX-2411, select the option you have installed. A pound sign (#) appears next to the option to indicate the present configuration. If you installed individual custom I/Os, select
Custom on the IOX Select Modules menu.
The Custom menu displays.
CUSTOM
Position 1 DI120AC
Position 2 AI420
Position 3 DI120AC
Position 4 AI420
Position 5 DI120AC
Position 6 AI420
Position 7 DI120AC
Position 8 AI420
7. Select the position in which the I/O is installed. Then, using the arrow keys, select from the list which I/O module is located in that position. The
individual I/Os are described in Table 3–6.
26
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Configuring I/O Modules for the IOX
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Table 3–6: I/O Descriptions
Description I/O Name
Digital I/Os
DI32DC
DI120AC
DO120AC
DI240AC
DO60DC
DO200DC
DO240AC
Analog I/Os
AI05
AI420
AO420
32 Vdc input (0.2ms turn on) polarized
120 Vac input
120 Vac output
240 Vac input
60 Vdc output
200 Vdc output
240 Vac output
0 to 5 Vdc analog input
4 to 20 mA analog input
4 to 20 mA analog output
8. Press the menu button until “Save Changes? No” flashes on the display.
Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save the changes.
Follow the steps below to configure the inputs and outputs for the I/O module you selected.
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
The password prompt displays.
2. Select your password. The default password is 0.
The Setup menu displays.
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
3. Select I/O.
The I/O menu displays.
I/O
KYZ
I/O Extender
27
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
4. Select the I/O option that you have installed. In this example, we selected the I/O Extender.
The I/O Extender Setup selection menu displays.
I/O EXTENDER SETUP
Select Modules
Configure Modules
5. Select the Configure Modules menu option.
The IOX Setup menu displays according to the IOX previously selected.
In this example the IOX Custom Setup menu displays.
IOX CUSTOM SETUP
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 5
Position 6
Position 7
Position 8
6. Select the position in which the I/O is installed.
The I/O module’s setup menu displays based on the type of module installed in the selected position.
ANALOG INPUT SETUP
Lbl: Analog In C02
Type 4-20mA Input
I/O Point # 36
Multiplier
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
1
400
2000
ANALOG OUTPUT SETUP
Lbl: Analog OutC04
Type 4-20mA Output
I/O Point # 38
Reference Reg
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
100
400
2000
DIGITAL INPUT SETUP
Lbl: Dig In C01
Type 120Vac Input
I/O Point # 35
Mode Normal
DIGITAL OUTPUT SETUP
Lbl: Dig Out C03
Type 120 Vac Output
I/O Point # 37
Mode
Pulse Const
Normal
****
Timer (secs)
Control
0
External
Associate Alarm
Configuring I/O Modules for the IOC
NOTE: For a description of the I/O options displayed above, refer
to “Input/Output Capabilities” on page 71.
When you install a digital I/O card (IOC44) in either of the optional card slots located on the top of the circuit monitor, the circuit monitor automatically recognizes that the card has been installed.
28
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
NOTE: For a description of I/O options, see “Input/Output Capabilities” on
page 71. To view the status of an I/O, see “Viewing I/O Status” on page 47.
You need to know the position number of the I/O to set it up. See “I/O Point
Numbers” on page 160 to determine this number.
To set up the I/O options, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
The password prompt displays.
2. Select your password. The default password is 0.
The Setup menu displays.
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
3. Select I/O.
The I/O menu displays.
I/O
KYZ
Slot B (IOC-44)
4. Select the I/O option that you have installed.
The IOC-44 Setup screen displays.
IOC-44 SETUP
Digital In
Digital In
Digital In
Digital In
Relay
Relay
Relay
Dig Out
BS1
BS2
BS3
BS4
BR1
BR2
BR3
BR0
29
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
5. Using the arrow buttons, select the options to configure for the individual inputs and relays. The setup menu that displays is based on which option you select.
DIGITAL INPUT SETUP
Lbl: Dig In B52
Type 120Vac Input
I/O Point # 20
Mode Normal
DIGITAL OUTPUT SETUP
Lbl: Dig Out BR2
Type 120 Vac Output
I/O Point # 24
Mode
Pulse Const
Normal
****
Timer (secs)
Control
0
External
Associate Alarm
NOTE: For a description of the I/O options displayed above, refer to the installation documentation that ships with the IOC44.
30
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Setting Up Passwords
Figure 3–9: Menus that can be password protected
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
CMPL
METERS
Summary
Power
Energy
Custom
MIN/MAX
Amps
Volts
Frequency
Power
THD
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
A password is always required to access the following menus from the
Main Menu:
•
Resets (a separate password can be set up for Energy/Demand Reset and Min/Max Reset)
•
Setup
•
Read/Write Regs on the Diagnostics Menu
The default password is 0. Therefore, when you receive a new circuit monitor, the password for the Setup, Diagnostics, and Reset menu is 0. If you choose to set up passwords, you can set up a different password for each of the four menus options listed above.
To set up a password, follow these instructions:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
The password prompt displays.
2. Select 0, the default password.
The Setup menu displays.
VIEW ALARMS
High Priority Alarms
I/O DISPLAY
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
CMPL
3. Select Passwords.
The Passwords menu displays. Table 3–7 describes the options.
RESETS
Energy
Demand
Min/Max
SETUP
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
DIAGNOSTICS
Read/Write Regs
PASSWORDS
Setup
Diagnostics
Engy/Dmd Reset
Min/Max Reset
0
0
0
0
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
31
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Advanced Setup Features
Creating Custom Quantities to be Displayed
32
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 3–7: Options for Password Setup
Option
Setup
Diagnostics
Engy/Dmd
Reset
*
Available Values Description
0–9998
Enter the password to be used for the Setup option on the Main Menu.
0–9998
0–9998
Enter the password to be used for the
Diagnostics option on the Main Menu.
Enter the password to be used for resetting
Energy and Demand. These options appear on the Reset menu, and they can also be
locked. See “Advanced Meter Setup” on page
Min/Max Reset
*
0–9998
Enter the password to be used for resetting the Min/Max, which appears on the Reset menu. This option can also be locked. See
“Advanced Meter Setup” on page 39 for
instructions.
*
The word “Locked” appears next to a reset option that is inaccessible. If all of the reset options are locked, “Locked” will appear next to the Resets option in the Main
Menu, and the Resets menu will be inaccessible.
The features discussed in this section are not required for basic circuit monitor setup, but can be used to customize your circuit monitor to suit your needs.
Any quantity that is stored in a register in the circuit monitor can be displayed on the remote display. The circuit monitor has a list of viewable quantities already defined, such as average current and power factor total.
In addition to these predefined values, you can define custom quantities that can be displayed on a custom screen. For example, if your facility uses different types of utility services—such as water, gas, and steam— you may want to track usage of the three services on one convenient screen. To do this, you could set up inputs to receive pulses from each utility meter, then display the scaled register quantity.
For the circuit monitor display, custom quantities can be used to display a value. Don’t confuse this feature with
SMS
custom quantities.
SMS
custom quantities are used to add new parameters which SMS can use to perform functions.
SMS
custom quantities are defined, for example, when you add a new PowerLogic-compatible device to
SMS
or if you want to import data into
SMS
from another software package. You can use the
SMS
custom quantities in custom tables and interactive graphics diagrams, but you cannot use circuit monitor display custom quantities in this way. Custom
quantities that you define for display from the circuit monitor are not available to
SMS
. They must be defined separately in SMS.
To use a custom quantity, perform these tasks:
1. Create the custom quantity as described in this section.
2. Create a custom screen on which the custom quantity can be displayed.
See “Creating Custom Screens” on page 35 for procedures. You can view
the custom screen by selecting from the Main Menu, Meters > Custom.
See “Viewing Custom Screens” on page 39 for more information.
To create a custom quantity, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
The password prompt displays.
2. Select your password. The default password is 0.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
The Setup menu displays.
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
CMPL
3. Select Display.
The Display menu displays.
DISPLAY
Language English
Date MM/DD/YYYY
Time Format AM/PM
VFD Sensitivity 2
Display Timer 5 Min
Custom Quantity
Custom Screen
4. Select Custom Quantity.
The Custom Quant Setup screen displays.
CUSTOM QUANT SETUP
Custom Quantity 1
Custom Quantity 2
Custom Quantity 3
Custom Quantity 4
Custom Quantity 5
Custom Quantity 6
Custom Quantity 7
Custom Quantity 8
Custom Quantity 9
Custom Quantity 10
33
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
5. Select a custom quantity.
In this example, we selected Custom Quantity 1. Table 3–8 shows the
available values.
Custom Quantity 1
Lbl:
Register 1,000
Scale
Format
1,000
Integer
6. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change.
7. Press the enter button to select the value. The value begins to blink. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the available values. Then, press the enter button to select the new value.
8. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the other options on the menu, or if you are finished, press the menu button to save the changes.
Table 3–8: Options for Custom Quantities
Option
Lbl
Register
Available Values
Name of the quantity up to 10 characters. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the characters. To move to the next option, press the menu button.
4- or 5-digit number of the register in which the quantity exists.
Default
1,000
Scale Multiplier of the register value can be one of the following:
.001, .01, .1, 1.0, 10, 100 or 1,000. See “Scale Factors” on page 89 for more information.
1,000
Format Integer
D/T—date and time
MOD10L4—Modulo 10,000 with 4 registers
➀
MOD10L3—Modulo 10,000 with 3 registers
➀
MOD10L2—Modulo 10,000 with 2 registers
➀
Label
➁
Text
➀
Modulo 10,000 is used to store energy. See the SMS online help for more.
➁
Use the Label format to create a label with no corresponding data register.
Integer
An asterisk (*) next to the quantity indicates that the quantity has been added to the list.
9. To save the changes to the Display Setup screen, press the menu button.
The custom quantity is added to the Quantities List in the Custom Screen
Setup. The new quantity appears at the end of this list after the standard quantities. After creating the custom quantity, you must create a custom screen to be able to view the new quantity.
34
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Creating Custom Screens
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
You choose the quantities—standard or custom—that are to be displayed on a custom screen. To display a custom quantity, you must first create it so
that it appears on the Quantities List. See “Creating Custom Quantities to be
Displayed” on page 32 for instructions.
To create a custom screen, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
The password prompt displays.
2. Select your password. The default password is 0.
The Setup menu displays.
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
3. Select Display.
The Display Setup menu displays.
DISPLAY
Language English
Date MM/DD/YYYY
Time Format AM/PM
VFD Sensitivity 2
Display Timer 5 Min
Custom Quantity
Custom Screen
4. Select Custom Screen.
The Custom Screen Setup screen displays.
CUSTOM SCREEN SETUP
Custom Screen 1
Custom Screen 2
Custom Screen 3
Custom Screen 4
Custom Screen 5
35
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
5. Select a custom screen.
In this example, we selected Custom Screen 1.
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
SCREEN 1
Screen 1
Blank Line
Blank Line
Blank Line
The cursor begins to blink.
6. Create a name for the custom screen. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the alphabet. Press the enter button to move to the next character field.
7. When you have finished naming the screen, press the menu button, then select the first blank line.
The first blank line begins to blink.
SCREEN 1
Monthly Energy Cost
Blank Line
Blank Line
Blank Line
8. Press the menu button again, then use the arrow buttons to select one of the following quantity types:
— Current
— Voltage
— Frequency
— Power Factor
— Power
— THD
— Energy
— Demand
— Harmonics
— Unbalance
— Custom
To view the quantities of a quantity type, press the enter button.
36
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
The first quantity flashes on the display.
SCREEN 1
Monthly Energy Cost
Ia
Blank Line
Blank Line
****A
9. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the list of quantities. Select the quantity that you want for your custom screen by pressing the enter button.
Table 3–9 lists the default quantities. If you have created a custom
quantity, it will be displayed at the bottom of this list.
Table 3–9: Available Default Quantities
Quantity Type Quantity
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Current A
Current B
Current C
Current N
Current G
Current Average
Voltage A–B
Voltage B–C
Voltage C-A
Voltage L–L Average
Voltage A–N
Voltage B–N
Voltage C–N
Voltage L–N Average
Label
Ia
Ib
Ic
In
Ig
I Avg
Vab
Vbc
Vca
*
V L-L Avg
Van
Vbn
Vcn
V L-N Avg
Frequency Freq
Power Factor Power Factor Total
Displacement Power Factor Total
PF Total
Dis PF Tot
Power
THD
Real Power Total
Reactive Power Total
Apparent Power Total
THD Current A kW Total kVAR Total kVA Total
THD Ia
THD Current B
THD Current C
THD Current N
THD Voltage A–N
THD Voltage B–N
THD Voltage C–N
THD Voltage A–B
THD Ib
THD Ic
THD In
THD Van
THD Vbn
THD Vcn
THD Vab
37
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 3–9:
Available Default Quantities (continued)
Quantity Type Quantity
THD Voltage B–C
THD Voltage C–A
Energy
Demand
Real Energy, Total
Reactive Energy, Total
Apparent Energy, Total
Demand Current Average
Demand Current A
Demand Current B
Demand Current C
Demand Current N
Demand Voltage A–N
Demand Voltage B–N
Demand Voltage C–N
Demand Voltage L–N Average
Harmonics
Unbalance
Demand Voltage A–B
Demand Voltage B–C
Demand Voltage C–A
Demand Voltage L–L Avg
Demand Real Power (kWD)
Demand Reactive Power (kVARD)
Demand Apparent Power (kVA)
3rd Harmonic Magnitude Voltage A
5th Harmonic Magnitude Voltage A
7th Harmonic Magnitude Voltage A
3rd Harmonic Magnitude Voltage B
5th Harmonic Magnitude Voltage B
7th Harmonic Magnitude Voltage B
3rd Harmonic Magnitude Voltage C
5th Harmonic Magnitude Voltage C
7th Harmonic Magnitude Voltage C
Current Unbalance Max
Voltage Unbalance Max L-L
Voltage Unbalance Max L-N
*
Displayed on the screen.
Van 5th
Van 7th
Vbn 3rd
Vbn 5th
Vbn 7th
Vcn 3rd
Vcn 5th
Vcn 7th
Dmd Vab
Dmd Vbc
Dmd Vca
Dmd V L-L
Dmd kW
Dmd kVAR
Dmd kVA
Van 3rd
I Unbl Mx
V Unbl Mx L–L
V Unbl Mx L–N
Label
*
THD Vbc
THD Vca kWHr Tot kVARHr Tot kVAHr Tot
Dmd I Avg
Dmd Ia
Dmd Ib
Dmd Ic
Dmd In
Dmd Van
Dmd Vbn
Dmd Vcn
Dmd V L-N
10. Press the menu button until “Save Changes? No” flashes on the display.
Press the arrow button to select Yes, then press the enter button to save the custom screen.
38
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Viewing Custom Screens
Advanced Meter Setup
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
If you have a custom screen setup, a “Custom” option will be displayed on the Meters menu.
To view a custom screen, from the Main Menu select Meters > Custom. In the following example, a custom screen was created for monthly energy cost.
Monthly Energy Cost
Dollars 8632
Press the arrow button to view the next custom screen. Press the menu button to exit and return to the Meters Menu.
The Advanced option on the Meter Setup screen lets you perform miscellaneous advanced setup functions on the metering portion of the circuit monitor. For example, on this menu you can change the phase rotation or the VAR sign convention. The advanced options are described below.
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup.
The password prompt displays.
2. Select your password. The default password is 0.
The Setup menu displays.
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
CMPL
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
39
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
3. Select Meter.
The Meter screen displays.
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
METER
Ø CT Primary
Ø CT Secondary
N CT Primary
N CT Secondary
PT Pri Scale
PT Primary x1
120
PT Secondary
Sys Type
120
3Ø4W3CT
5
5
5
5
Frequency (Hz) 60
Pwr Dmd Meth Slide
Pwr Dmd Int
Pwr Dmd Sub Int
15
1
Power Quality
Advanced
4. Scroll to the bottom of the list and select Advanced.
The Advanced Meter Setup screen displays. Table 3–10 describes the
options on this menu.
ADVANCED METER SETUP
Phase Rotation ABC
Incr Energy Int 60
THD Meth THD(%Fund)
VAR Sign IEEE/IEC
Lock Energy Reset N
Lock Pk Dmd Reset N
Lock M/M Reset N
Lock Meter Init N
5. Change the desired options and press the menu button to save.
Table 3–10: Options for Advanced Meter Setup
Option
Phase Rotation
Incr Energy Int
THD Meth
VAR Sign
Lock Energy Reset
Available Values Selection Description
ABC or CBA Set the phase rotation to match the system.
0–1440
THD (%Fund) or thd (%RMS)
IEEE/IEC or
ALT (CM1)
Y or N
Default
ABC
Set incremental energy interval in minutes. The interval must be evenly divisible into
24 hours.
60
Set the calculation for total harmonic distortion. See “Power Analysis Values” on page
68 for a detailed description.
THD
Set the VAR sign convention. See “VAR Sign Conventions” on page 58 for a
discussion about VAR sign convention.
IEEE/IEC
Lock the reset of the accumulated energy. If set to Y (yes), the Energy option on the
Reset menu will be locked so that the value cannot be reset from the display, even if
N
40
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Table 3–10: Options for Advanced Meter Setup (continued)
Lock Pk Dmd Reset Y or N
Lock M/M Reset
Lock Meter Init
Y or N
Y or N
Lock the reset of peak demand. If set to Y (yes), the Demand option on the Reset menu will be locked so that the value cannot be reset from the display, even if a
Lock the reset of the min/max values. If set to Y (yes), the Min/Max option on the Reset menu will be locked so that the value cannot be reset from the display, even if a
N
Lock access to Meter Initialization. If set to Y (Yes), the Meter Init option on the Resets menu will be locked so that this function cannot be done from the display, even if a
password has been set up for the Setup/Meter Init option. See “Resetting Min/Max,
Demand, and Energy Values” on page 41 for more information.
N
RESETTING MIN/MAX, DEMAND, AND
ENERGY VALUES
A reset clears the circuit monitor’s memory of the last recorded value. For example, you might need to reset monthly peak demand power. From the
Reset menu, shown in Figure 3–10, you can reset the following values:
•
Energy—accumulated energy and conditional energy
•
Demand—peak power demand and peak current demand
•
Min/Max—minimum and maximum values for all real-time readings
Figure 3–10: Performing resets from the Reset menu
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
View Alarms
I/O Display
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
CMPL
RESETS
Energy
Demand
Min/Max
Meter Init
A password is required to reset any of the options on the Reset menu. The
default password is 0. See “Setting Up Passwords” on page 31 for more
information about passwords.
You can perform resets from the circuit monitor as described in this section; or, if you are using SMS , you can set up a task to perform the reset automatically at a specified time. See the
SMS
online help for instructions.
NOTE: To stop users from using the display to reset energy, peak demand,
and min/max values, see “Advanced Meter Setup” on page 39 for instructions
on using the reset locking feature.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
41
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
To perform resets, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Resets.
The Resets menu displays.
RESETS
Energy
Demand
Min/Max
Meter Init
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
RESET ENERGY
Accumulated No
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options on the
Resets menu. To select a menu option, press the enter button.
Depending on the option you select, the screen for that value displays.
RESET DEMAND
PK Power Demand No
PK Amp Demand No
RESET MIN/MAX
Min/Max No
METER INIT
This will reset:
Energy, Demand,
Files, Trending,
Min/Max values, and Disable Alarms.
METER INIT
Perform Reset? No
VIEWING METERED DATA
3. Select the option you would like to reset, and change No to Yes by pressing the arrow button.
4. Press Enter to move to the next option, or press the menu button to reset the value.
The Meters menu and the Min/Max menu, shown in Figure 3–11, are view-
only menus where you can view metered data in real time.
Figure 3–11: Viewing metered data on the Meters and Min/Max menus
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
View Alarms
I/O Display
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
METERS
Summary
Power
Power Quality
Energy
Power Demand
Current Demand
MIN/MAX
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Power
Power Factor thd
42
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Viewing Metered Data from the Meters
Menu
Viewing Minimum and Maximum Values from the Min/Max Menu
Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options on the Meters menu. To select a menu option, press the enter button. To select another option, press the menu button.
From the Meters menu you can view the following information.
•
Summary—lets you quickly move through and view the following:
— Summary total of volts, amperes, and kW
— Amperes and volts for all three phases, neutral and ground, line to line, line to neutral
— Power kW, kVAR, and kVA (real, reactive, and apparent power)
3-phase totals
— Power factor (true and displacement) 3-phase totals
— Total energy kWh, kVARh, and kVAh 3-phase totals (real, reactive, and apparent energy)
— Frequency in hertz
•
Power—This option lets you view power per-phase kW, kVAR, and kVA
(real, reactive, and apparent power). It is available only if the circuit monitor is configured for 4-wire system; it will not appear for 3-wire systems. If you are using a 4-wire system, you can view the leading and lagging values for true and displacement power factor.
•
Power Quality—shows the following values per phase:
— THD voltage line to neutral and line to line
— THD amperes
— K-factor
— Fundamental volts and phase angle
— Fundamental amperes and phase angle
•
Energy—shows accumulated and incremental readings for real and reactive energy into and out of the load, and the real, reactive, and apparent total of all three phases.
•
Power Demand—displays total and peak power demand kW, kVAR, and kVA (real, reactive, and apparent power) for the last completed demand interval. It also shows the peak power demand kW, kVAR, and kVA with date, time, and coincident power factor (leading and lagging) associated with that peak.
•
Current Demand—shows total and peak demand current for all three phases, neutral, and ground. It also shows the date and time of the peak demand current.
From the Min/Max menu, you can view the minimum and maximum values recorded by the circuit monitor, and the date and time when that min or max value occurred. These values are:
•
Current
•
Voltage
•
Frequency
•
Power
•
Power Factor
•
THD
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
43
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
To use the Min/Max menu, follow these steps:
1. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options on the
Min/Max menu.
MIN/MAX
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Power
Power Factor
THD
2. To select a menu option, press the enter button.
The screen for that value displays. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the min/max quantities.
CURRENT A
Min
Max
0A
0A
Press Enter for D/T
3. To view the date and time when the minimum and maximum value was reached, press the enter button. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the dates and times.
CURRENT A
Mn 01/22/2000 1:59A
Mx 01/22/2000 8:15A
4. Press the enter button to return to the Min/Max values
5. Press the menu button to return to the Min/Max menu.
44
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
VIEWING ALARMS
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
The View Alarms menu, shown in Figure 3–12, lets you view active and
high priority alarms.
Figure 3–12: View Alarms menu
VIEW ALARMS
Active Alarms List
High Priority Log
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
View Alarms
I/O Display
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
CMPL
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
When an alarm is first set up, an alarm priority is selected. Four alarm levels are available:
•
High priority—if high priority alarm occurs, the display informs you in two ways:
— The LED on the display flashes while the alarm is active and until you acknowledge the alarm.
— A message displays whether the alarm is active or unacknowledged.
•
Medium priority—if a medium priority alarm occurs, the LED flashes and a message displays only while the alarm is active. Once the alarm becomes inactive, the LED and message stop.
•
Low priority—if a low priority alarm occurs, the
LED
on the display flashes only while the alarm is active. No alarm message is displayed.
•
No priority—if an alarm is set up with no priority, no visible representation will appear on the display.
If multiple alarms with different priorities are active at the same time, the display shows the alarm message for the last alarm.
Each time an alarm occurs, the circuit monitor does the following:
•
•
Performs any assigned action. The action could be one of the following:
— Operate one or more relays (you can view the status from the display)
— Force data log entries into the user-defined data log files (1–14 data logs can be viewed from
SMS
)
— Perform a waveform capture (can be viewed from SMS )
•
Records the occurrence of high, medium, and low priority events in the circuit monitor’s alarm log (can be viewed using
SMS)
.
Also, the LED and alarm messages will operate according to the priority selected when an alarm occurs.
45
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Viewing Active Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The Active Alarms List displays currently active alarms, regardless of their priority. You can view all active alarms from the Main Menu by selecting
View Alarms > Active Alarms List. The Active Alarms list displays. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the alarms that are active.
ACTIVE ALARMS LIST 1/1
Over Van
Priority
Relay assigned
High
No
Alarm Number/Total
Alarms Active
Alarm Name
Alarm Priority
Indicates whether a relay is assigned
Viewing and Acknowledging High
Priority Alarms
To view high priority alarms, from the Main Menu select View Alarms >
High Priority Log. The High Priority Log screen displays. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the alarms.
Log Position
HIGH PRIORITY LOG 1
Over Van
Unacknowledged
Relay Assigned No
Indicates alarm is unacknowledged
Indicates whether a relay is assigned
The High Priority Alarms screen displays the ten most recent, high-priority alarms. When you acknowledge the high-priority alarms, all digital outputs
(relays) that are configured for latched mode will be released. To acknowledge all high-priority alarms, follow these steps:
1. After viewing the alarms, press the menu button to exit.
The display asks you whether you would like to acknowledge the alarm.
HIGH PRIORITY ALARMS
Acknowledge
Alarms? No
46
2. To acknowledge the alarms, press the arrow button to change No to
Yes. Then, press the enter button.
3. Press the menu button to exit.
NOTE: You have acknowledged the alarms, but the LED will continue to flash as long as any high-priority alarm is active.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
VIEWING I/O STATUS
HARMONIC VALUES
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
The I/O Display menu shows the
ON
or
OFF
status of the digital inputs or outputs. For analog inputs and outputs, it displays the present value. To view the status of inputs and outputs:
1. From the Main Menu, select I/O Display.
The I/O Display screen displays.
I/O DISPLAY
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
Digital Outputs
Analog Outputs
2. Select the input or output for which you’d like to view the status. In this example, we selected Digital Outputs to display the status of the
KYZ output.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
KYZ OFF
3. Press the menu button to exit.
The firmware has been updated to allow additional presentation units for
harmonic magnitudes. See Table 3 on page 165 for register 3241
ammendments.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
47
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
READING AND WRITING REGISTERS
Figure 3–13: Diagnostics Menu accessed from the Main
Menu
METERS
Summary
Power
Energy
Custom
MIN/MAX
Current
Voltage
Frequency
Power
thd
VIEW ALARMS
Active Alarms List
High Priority Log
To read or write registers, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu displays.
DIAGNOSTICS
Meter Information
CVM Information
Read/Write Regs
Wiring Error Test
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
You can access the read and write register menu option on the circuit monitor’s display by selecting from the Main Menu > Diagnostics >
Read/Write Regs as shown in Figure 3–13. This option lets you read and
write circuit monitor registers from the display. This capability is most useful to users who:
• need to set up an advanced feature which is beyond the circuit monitor’s normal front panel setup mode
• do not have access to
SMS
to set up the feature
NOTE: Use this feature with caution. Writing an incorrect value, or writing to the wrong register could affect the intended operation of the circuit monitor or its accessories.
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
CMPL
I/O DISPLAY
2. Select Read/Write Regs.
The password prompt displays.
3. Select your password. The default password is 0.
The Read/Write Regs screen displays. Table 3–11 describes the options
on this screen.
RESETS
Energy
Demand
Min/Max
SETUP
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
DIAGNOSTICS
READ/WRITE REGS
Reg
1003
Hex Dec
000A 10
Table 3–11: Read/Write Register Options
Option
Reg
Hex
Dec
Available Values
List the register numbers.
List the hexidecimal value of that register.
List the decimal value of that register.
If you are viewing a metered value, such as voltage, the circuit monitor updates the displayed value as the register contents change. Note that
48
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PERFORMING A WIRING ERROR TEST
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
scale factors are not taken into account automatically when viewing register contents.
4. To scroll through the register numbers, use the arrow buttons.
5. To change the value in the register, press the enter button.
The Hex and Dec values begin to blink. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the numeric values available.
NOTE: Some circuit monitor registers are read/write, some are read
only. You can write to read/write registers only.
6. When you are finished making changes to that register, press the enter button to continue to the next register, or press the menu button to save the changes.
The circuit monitor has the ability to perform a wiring diagnostic self-check when you select the Diagnostic > Wiring Error Test from the Main Menu as
Figure 3–14: Wiring Error Test option on the Diagnostics menu.
MAIN MENU
Meters
Min/Max
View Alarms
I/O Display
Resets
Setup
Diagnostics
CMPL
DIAGNOSTICS
Meter Information
CVM Information
Read/Write Regs
Wiring Error Test
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
The circuit monitor can diagnose possible wiring errors when you initiate the wiring test on the Diagnostics menu. Running the test is not required, but may help you to pinpoint a potentially miswired connection. Before running the wiring test, you must first wire the circuit monitor and perform the minimum set up of the circuit monitor, which includes setting up these parameters:
•
CT primary and secondary
•
PT primary and secondary
•
System type
•
Frequency
After you have wired and completed the minimum set up, run the wiring test to verify proper wiring of your circuit monitor. The wiring test assumes that the following is true about your system:
•
Voltage connection V an
(4-wire) or V ab
(3-wire) is correct. This connection must be properly wired for the wiring check program to work.
•
3-phase system. The system must be a 3-phase system. You cannot perform a wiring check on a single-phase system.
•
System type. The wiring check can be performed only on the six possible system types: 3
Φ
3W2CT, 3
Φ
3W3CT, 3
Φ
4W3CT, 3
Φ
4W4CT,
49
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
3
Φ
4W3CT2PT, and 3
Φ
4W4CT2PT (system types are described in the installation manual).
•
Expected displacement power factor is between .60 lagging and .99 leading.
•
The load must be at least 1% of the CT Primary setting.
This wiring error program is based on the assumptions above and based on a typical wiring system, results may vary depending on your system and some errors may not apply to your system. When the wiring test is run, the program performs the following checks in this order:
1. Verifies that the system type is one of those listed above.
2. Verifies that the frequency is within ±5% of the frequency that you selected in circuit monitor set up.
3. Verifies that the voltage phase angles are 120° apart. If the voltage connections are correct, the phase angles will be 120° apart.
4. If the voltage connections are correct, the test continues.
5. Verifies that the measured phase rotation is the same as the phase rotation set up in the circuit monitor.
6. Verifies the magnitude of the currents to see if there is enough load on each phase input to perform the check.
7. Indicates if the 3-phase real power (kW) total is negative, which could indicate a wiring error.
8. Compares each current angle to its respective voltage.
Running the Diagnostics Wiring Error
Test
When the circuit monitor detects a possible error, you can find and correct the problem and then run the check again. Repeat the procedure until no error messages are displayed. To perform a wiring diagnostic test, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu displays.
DIAGNOSTICS
Meter Information
CVM Information
Read/Write Regs
Wiring Error Test
50
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
2. Select Wiring Error Test from the menu.
The circuit monitor asks if the wiring matches the test assumptions.
Test Assumptions:
Va and Vn for 4-wire
Va and Vb for 3-wire are correct.
3. Press the down arrow button.
The circuit monitor asks if the expected displacement power factor is between 0.60 lagging and 0.99 leading.
Test Assumptions:
Displacement PF is between 0.60 lag and 0.99 lead.
4. Press the down arrow button, again.
The circuit monitor asks if you’d like to perform a wiring check.
Perform Test No
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
5. Select “Yes” to perform the test by pressing the up arrow button and then pressing the enter button.
The circuit monitor performs the wiring test.
If it doesn’t find any errors, the circuit monitor displays “Wire test complete. No errors found!”. If it finds possible errors, it displays “Error detected. See following screens for details.”
6. Press the arrow buttons to scroll through the wiring error messages.
Table 3–12 on page 52 explains the possible wiring error messages.
7. Turn off all power supplying the circuit monitor. Verify that the power is off using a properly rated voltage testing device.
51
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 3–12: Wiring Error Messages
Message
Invalid system type
Frequency out of range
Voltage not present on all phases
Severe voltage unbalance present
Not enough load to check wiring
Suspected error: Check meter configuration for direct connection
Suspected error: Reverse polarity on all current inputs
Phase rotation does not match meter setup
Negative kW, check CT & VT polarities
No voltage metered on V1–n
No voltage metered on V2–n
No voltage metered on V3–n
No voltage metered on V1–2
No voltage metered on V2–3
No voltage metered on V3-1
V2–n phase angle out of range
V3–n phase angle out of range
V2–3 phase angle out of range
V3–1 phase angle out of range
Suspected error: Reverse polarity on V2–n VT
Suspected error: Reverse polarity on V3–n VT
Suspected error: Reverse polarity on V2–3 VT
Suspected error: Polarity on V3–1 VT
Suspected error: Check V1 input, may be V2 VT
Suspected error: Check V2 input, may be V3 VT
Suspected error: Check V3 input, may be V1 VT
52
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Turn off all power supplying the circuit monitor and the equipment in which it is installed before working on it.
• Use a properly rated voltage testing device to verify that the power is off.
• Never short the secondary of a PT.
• Never open circuit a CT; use the shorting block to short circuit the leads of the CT before removing the connection from the circuit monitor.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
8. Correct the wiring errors.
9. Repeat these steps until all errors are corrected.
Description
The circuit monitor is set up for a system type that the wiring test does not support.
Actual frequency of the system is not the same as the selected frequency configured for the circuit monitor.
No voltage metered on one or more phases.
Voltage unbalance on any phase greater than 70%.
Metered current below deadband on one or more phases.
Set up for voltage input should be “No PT.”
Check polarities. Polarities on all CTs could be reversed.
Metered phase rotation is different than phase rotation selected in the circuit monitor set up.
Metered kW is negative, which could indicate swapped polarities on any CT or VT.
No voltage metered on V1–n on 4-wire system only.
No voltage metered on V2–n on 4-wire system only.
No voltage metered on V3–n on 4-wire system only.
No voltage metered on V1–2.
No voltage metered on V2–3.
No voltage metered on V3-1.
V2–n phase angle out of expected range.
V3–n phase angle out of expected range.
V2–3 phase angle out of expected range.
V3–1 phase angle out of expected range.
Polarity of V2–n VT could be reversed. Check polarity.
Polarity of V3–n VT could be reversed. Check polarity.
Polarity of V2–3 VT could be reversed. Check polarity.
Polarity of V3–1 VT could be reversed. Check polarity.
Phase 2 VT may actually be connected to input V1.
Phase 3 VT may actually be connected to input V12
Phase 1 VT may actually be connected to input V3.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 3–12: Wiring Error Messages (continued)
Message
Suspected error: Check V1 input, may be V3 VT
Suspected error: Check V2 input, may be V1 VT
Suspected error: Check V3 input, may be V2 VT
I1 load current less than 1% CT
I2 load current less than 1% CT
I3 load current less than 1% CT
I1 phase angle out of range. Cause of error unknown.
I2 phase angle out of range. Cause of error unknown
I3 phase angle out of range. Cause of error unknown.
Suspected error: Reverse polarity on I1 CT.
Suspected error: Reverse polarity on I2 CT
Suspected error: Reverse polarity on I3 CT
Suspected error: Check I1 input, may be I2 CT
Suspected error: Check I2 input, may be I3 CT
Suspected error: Check I3 input, may be I1 CT
Suspected error: Check I1 input, may be I3 CT
Suspected error: Check I2 input, may be I1 CT
Suspected error: Check I3 input, may be I2 CT
Suspected error: Check I1 input, may be I2 CT with reverse polarity
Suspected error: Check I2 input, may be I3 CT with reverse polarity
Suspected error: Check I3 input, may be I1 CT with reverse polarity
Suspected error: Check I1 input, may be I3 CT with reverse polarity
Suspected error: Check I2 input, may be I1 CT with reverse polarity
Suspected error. Check I3 input, may be I2 CT with reverse polarity
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
Description
Phase 3 VT may actually be connected to input V1.
Phase 1 VT may actually be connected to input V2.
Phase 2 VT may actually be connected to input V3.
Metered current on I1 less than 1% of CT. Test could not continue.
Metered current on I2 less than 1% of CT. Test could not continue.
Metered current on I3 less than 1% of CT. Test could not continue.
I1 phase angle is out of expected range. Cause of error unable to be determined.
I2 phase angle is out of expected range. Cause of error unable to be determined.
I3 phase angle is out of expected range. Cause of error unable to be determined.
Polarity of I1 CT could be reversed. Check polarity.
Polarity of I2 CT could be reversed. Check polarity.
Polarity of I3 CT could be reversed. Check polarity.
Phase 2 CT may actually be connected to input I1.
Phase 3 CT may actually be connected to input I2.
Phase 1 CT may actually be connected to input I3.
Phase 3 CT may actually be connected to input I1.
Phase 1 CT may actually be connected to input I2.
Phase 2 CT may actually be connected to input I3.
Phase 2 CT may actually be connected to input I1, and the CT polarity may also be reversed.
Phase 3 CT may actually be connected to input I21, and the CT polarity may also be reversed.
Phase 1 CT may actually be connected to input I3, and the CT polarity may also be reversed.
Phase 3 CT may actually be connected to input I1, and the CT polarity may also be reversed.
Phase 1 CT may actually be connected to input I2, and the CT polarity may also be reversed.
Phase 2 CT may actually be connected to input I3, and the CT polarity may also be reversed.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
53
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 3—Operation
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
54
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CHAPTER 4—METERING CAPABILITIES
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
REAL-TIME READINGS
The circuit monitor measures currents and voltages and reports in real time the rms values for all three phases, neutral, and ground current. In addition, the circuit monitor calculates power factor, real power, reactive power, and more.
Table 4–1 lists some of the real-time readings that are updated every
second along with their reportable ranges.
Table 4–1: One-Second, Real-Time Readings Samples
Reportable Range Real-Time Readings
Current
Per-Phase
Neutral*
Ground*
3-Phase Average
Apparent rms
% Unbalance
Voltage
Line-to-Line, Per-Phase
Line-to-Line, 3-Phase Average
Line-to-Neutral, Per-Phase*
Neutral to Ground*
Line-to-Neutral, 3-Phase Average
% Unbalance
Real Power
Per-Phase*
3-Phase Total
Reactive Power
Per-Phase*
3-Phase Total
Apparent Power
Per-Phase*
3-Phase Total
Power Factor (True)
Per-Phase*
3-Phase Total
Power Factor (Displacement)
Per-Phase *
3-Phase Total
Frequency
45–67 Hz
350–450 Hz
Temperature (Internal Ambient)
* Wye systems only.
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to ±100.0%
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 100.0%
0 to ± 3,276.70 MW
0 to ± 3,276.70 MW
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVA
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVA
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
45.00 to 67.00 Hz
350.00 to 450.00 Hz
–100.00°C to +100.00°C
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
55
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The circuit monitor also has the capability of 100 ms updates. The 100 ms
readings listed in Table 4–2 can be communicated over
MODBUS TCP and are useful for rms event recording and high-speed alarms.
Table 4–2: 100 ms Real-Time Readings
Real-Time Readings
Current
Per-Phase
Neutral*
Ground*
3-Phase Average
Apparent rms
Voltage
Line-to-Line, Per-Phase
Line-to-Line, 3-Phase Average
Line-to-Neutral, Per-Phase*
Neutral to Ground*
Line-to-Neutral, 3-Phase Average*
Real Power
Per-Phase*
3-Phase Total
Reactive Power
Per-Phase*
3-Phase Total
Apparent Power
Per-Phase*
3-Phase Total
Power Factor
3-Phase Total
* Wye systems only.
Reportable Range
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to 1,200 kV
0 to ± 3,276.70 MW
0 to ± 3,276.70 MW
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVA
0 to ± 3,276.70 MVA
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
MIN/MAX VALUES FOR REAL-TIME
READINGS
When any one-second real-time reading reaches its highest or lowest value, the circuit monitor saves the value in its nonvolatile memory. These values are called the minimum and maximum (min/max) values. Two logs are associated with min/max values. The Min/Max Log stores the minimum and maximum values since the last reset of the min/max values. The other log, the Interval Min/Max/Average Log, determines min/max values over a specified interval and records the minimum, maximum, and average values for pre-defined quantities over that specified interval. For example, the circuit monitor could record the min, max, and average every 1440 minutes
(total minutes in a day) to record the daily value of quantities such as kW
demand. See Logging on page 101 for more about the Min/Max/Average
log.
56
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Power Factor Min/Max Conventions
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
From the circuit monitor display you can:
•
View all min/max values since the last reset and view their associated
dates and times. See “Viewing Minimum and Maximum Values from the
Min/Max Menu” on page 43 for instructions.
•
Reset min/max values. See “Resetting Min/Max, Demand, and Energy
Values” on page 41 for reset instructions.
Using
SMS
you can also upload both onboard logs—and their associated dates and times—from the circuit monitor and save them to disk. For instructions on working with logs using
SMS
, refer to the
SMS
online help file included with the software.
All running min/max values, except for power factor, are arithmetic minimum and maximum values. For example, the minimum phase A–B voltage is the lowest value in the range 0 to 1200 kV that has occurred since the min/max values were last reset. In contrast, because the power factor’s midpoint is unity (equal to one), the power factor min/max values are not true arithmetic minimums and maximums. Instead, the minimum value represents the measurement closest to –0 on a continuous scale for all realtime readings –0 to 1.00 to +0. The maximum value is the measurement closest to +0 on the same scale.
Figure 4–1 below shows the min/max values in a typical environment in
which a positive power flow is assumed. In the figure, the minimum power factor is –.7 (lagging) and the maximum is .8 (leading). Note that the minimum power factor need not be lagging, and the maximum power factor need not be leading. For example, if the power factor values ranged from
–.75 to –.95, then the minimum power factor would be –.75 (lagging) and the maximum power factor would be –.95 (lagging). Both would be negative.
Likewise, if the power factor ranged from +.9 to +.95, the minimum would be
+.95 (leading) and the maximum would be +.90 (leading). Both would be positive in this case.
Figure 4–1: Power factor min/max example
Minimum
Power Factor
–.7 (lagging)
.6
.8
Range of
Power Factor
Values
Unity
1.00
.8
Maximum
Power Factor
.8 (leading)
.6
Lag
(–)
.4
.4
Lead
(+)
.2
.2
–0
+0
Note: Assumes a positive power flow
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
57
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
VAR SIGN CONVENTIONS
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
An alternate power factor storage method is also available for use with analog outputs and trending.
The circuit monitor can be set to one of two VAR sign conventions, the standard IEEE or the ALT (CM1). Circuit monitors manufactured before
March 2000 default to the ALT VAR sign convention.The Series 4000 circuit
monitors (all modles) default to the IEEE VAR sign convention. Figure 4–2
illustrates the VAR sign convention defined by IEEE and the default used by previous model circuit monitors (CM1). For instructions on changing the
VAR sign convention, refer to “Advanced Meter Setup” on page 39.
Quadrant
2
watts negative (–) vars negative (–) power factor leading (+)
Reactive
Power In
Quadrant
1
watts positive (+) vars negative (–) power factor lagging (–)
Figure 4–2: Reactive Power—VAR sign convention
Reactive
Power In
Quadrant
2
watts negative (–) vars positive (+) power factor leading (+)
Quadrant
1
watts positive (+) vars positive (+) power factor lagging (–)
Reverse Power Flow
watts negative (–) vars positive (+) power factor lagging (–)
Normal Power Flow
watts postive (+) vars positive (+) power factor leading (+)
Real
Power
In
Quadrant
3
Quadrant
4
Reverse Power Flow
watts negative (–) vars negative (–) power factor lagging (–)
Normal Power Flow
watts positive (+) vars negative (–) power factor leading (+)
Real
Power
In
Quadrant
3
Quadrant
4
ALT (CM2/CM2000) VAR Sign Convention IEEE VAR Sign Convention
(Series 4000 (all models) Circuit Monitor Default)
58
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
DEMAND READINGS
Demand Power Calculation Methods
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
The circuit monitor provides a variety of demand readings, including
coincident readings and predicted demands. Table 4–3 lists the available
demand readings and their reportable ranges.
Table 4–3: Demand Readings
Demand Readings
Demand Current, Per-Phase, 3Ø Average, Neutral
Last Complete Interval
Peak
Demand Voltage, L–N, L–L, Per-phase, Average, N-G
Last Complete Interval
Minimum
Peak
Average Power Factor (True), 3Ø Total
Last Complete Interval
Coincident with kW Peak
Coincident with kVAR Peak
Coincident with kVA Peak
Demand Real Power, 3Ø Total
Last Complete Interval
Predicted
Peak
Coincident kVA Demand
Coincident kVAR Demand
Demand Reactive Power, 3Ø Total
Last Complete Interval
Predicted
Peak
Coincident kVA Demand
Coincident kW Demand
Demand Apparent Power, 3Ø Total
Last Complete Interval
Predicted
Peak
Coincident kW Demand
Coincident kVAR Demand
Reportable Range
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 32,767 A
0 to 1200 kV
0 to 1200 kV
0 to 1200 kV
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
0 to ± 3276.70 MW
0 to ± 3276.70 MW
0 to ± 3276.70 MW
0 to ± 3276.70 MVA
0 to ± 3276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3276.70 MVAR
0 to ± 3276.70 MVA
0 to ± 3276.70 MW
0 to ± 3276.70 MVA
0 to ± 3276.70 MVA
0 to ± 3276.70 MVA
0 to ± 3276.70 MW
0 to ± 3276.70 MVAR
Demand power is the energy accumulated during a specified period divided by the length of that period. How the circuit monitor performs this calculation depends on the method you select. To be compatible with electric utility billing practices, the circuit monitor provides the following types of demand power calculations:
•
Block Interval Demand
•
Synchronized Demand
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
59
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
Block Interval Demand
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The default demand calculation is set to sliding block with a 15 minute interval. You can set up any of the demand power calculation methods from the display or from
SMS
. For instructions on how to setup the demand
calculation from the display, see “Setting Up the Metering Functions of the
Circuit Monitor” on page 17. See the
SMS
online help to perform the set up using the software.
In the block interval demand method, you select a “block” of time that the circuit monitor uses for the demand calculation. You choose how the circuit monitor handles that block of time (interval). Three different modes are possible:
•
Sliding Block. In the sliding block interval, you select an interval from 1 to 60 minutes (in 1-minute increments). If the interval is between 1 and
15 minutes, the demand calculation updates every 15 seconds. If the interval is between 16 and 60 minutes, the demand calculation updates
every 60 seconds. The circuit monitor displays the demand value for the last completed interval.
•
Fixed Block. In the fixed block interval, you select an interval from 1 to
60 minutes (in 1-minute increments). The circuit monitor calculates and updates the demand at the end of each interval.
•
Rolling Block. In the rolling block interval, you select an interval and a subinterval. The subinterval must divide evenly into the interval. For example, you might set three 5-minute subintervals for a 15-minute interval. Demand is updated at each subinterval. The circuit monitor displays the demand value for the last completed interval.
Figure 4–3 on page 61 illustrates the three ways to calculate demand power
using the block method. For illustration purposes, the interval is set to 15 minutes.
60
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
Figure 4–3: Block Interval Demand Examples
Calculation updates every 15 or
60 seconds
15-minute interval
Demand value is the average for the last completed interval
15 30 45 60
. . .
Time
(sec)
Sliding Block
1 5
Calculation updates at the end of the interval
15-minute interval
30
15-minute interval
Fixed Block
45
Demand value is the average for last completed interval
15-min
Time
(min)
Calculation updates at the end of the subinterval (5 min.)
15-minute interval
1 5
20 25 30 35
Rolling Block
40 45
Demand value is the average for last completed interval
Time
(min)
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
61
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
Synchronized Demand
Demand Current
Demand Voltage
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The demand calculations can be synchronized by accepting an external pulse input, a command sent over communications, or by synchronizing to the internal real-time clock.
•
Input Synchronized Demand. You can set up the circuit monitor to accept an input such as a demand synch pulse from an external source.
The circuit monitor then uses the same time interval as the other meter for each demand calculation. You can use any digital input installed on the meter to receive the synch pulse. When setting up this type of demand, you select whether it will be input-synchronized block or inputsynchronized rolling block demand. The rolling block demand requires that you choose a subinterval.
•
Command Synchronized Demand. Using command synchronized demand, you can synchronize the demand intervals of multiple meters on a communications network. For example, if a PLC input is monitoring a pulse at the end of a demand interval on a utility revenue meter, you could program the PLC to issue a command to multiple meters whenever the utility meter starts a new demand interval. Each time the command is issued, the demand readings of each meter are calculated for the same interval. When setting up this type of demand, you select whether it will be command-synchronized block or commandsynchronized rolling block demand. The rolling block demand requires that you choose a subinterval.
•
Clock Synchronized Demand. You can synchronize the demand interval to the internal real-time clock in the circuit monitor. This enables you to synchronize the demand to a particular time, typically on the hour.
The default time is 12:00 am. If you select another time of day when the demand intervals are to be synchronized, the time must be in minutes from midnight. For example, to synchronize at 8:00 am, select 480 minutes. When setting up this type of demand, you select whether it will be clock-synchronized block or clock-synchronized rolling block demand. The rolling block demand requires that you choose a subinterval.
The circuit monitor calculates demand current using the thermal demand method. The default interval is 15 minutes, but you can set the demand current interval between 1 and 60 minutes in 1-minute increments.
The circuit monitor calculates demand voltage. The default voltage demand mode is thermal demand with a 15-minute demand interval. You can also set the demand voltage to any of the block interval demand modes
described in “Block Interval Demand” on page 60.
62
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Thermal Demand
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
The thermal demand method calculates the demand based on a thermal response, which mimics thermal demand meters. The demand calculation updates at the end of each interval. You select the demand interval from 1
to 60 minutes (in 1-minute increments). In Figure 4–4 the interval is set to
15 minutes for illustration purposes.
Figure 4–4: Thermal Demand Example
The interval is a window of time that moves across the timeline.
99%
90%
Last completed demand interval
0%
15-minute interval next
15-minute interval
Calculation updates at the end of each interval
Time
(minutes)
Predicted Demand
The circuit monitor calculates predicted demand for the end of the present interval for kW, kVAR, and kVA demand. This prediction takes into account the energy consumption thus far within the present (partial) interval and the present rate of consumption. The prediction is updated every second.
Figure 4–5 illustrates how a change in load can affect predicted demand for
the interval.
Figure 4–5: Predicted Demand Example
Predicted demand is updated every second.
Demand for last completed interval
Beginning of interval
15-minute interval
Partial Interval
Demand
Predicted demand if load is added during interval, predicted demand increases to reflect increased demand
1:00 1:06 1:15
Change in Load
Predicted demand if no load added
Time
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
Peak Demand
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
In nonvolatile memory, the circuit monitor maintains a running maximum for power demand values, called “peak demand.” The peak is the highest average for each of these readings: kWD, kVARD, and kVAD since the last reset. The circuit monitor also stores the date and time when the peak demand occurred. In addition to the peak demand, the circuit monitor also stores the coinciding average 3-phase power factor. The average 3-phase power factor is defined as “demand kW/demand kVA” for the peak demand
interval. Table 4–3 on page 59 lists the available peak demand readings
from the circuit monitor.
You can reset peak demand values from the circuit monitor display. From the Main Menu, select Resets > Demand. You can also reset the values over the communications link by using
SMS
. See the
SMS
online help for instructions.
NOTE: You should reset peak demand after changes to basic meter setup, such as CT ratio or system type.
Generic Demand
The circuit monitor also stores the peak demand during the last incremental
energy interval. See “Energy Readings” on page 66 for more about
incremental energy readings.
The circuit monitor can perform any of the demand calculation methods, described earlier in this chapter, on up to 20 quantities that you choose. In
SMS the quantities are divided into two groups of 10, so you can set up two different demand “profiles.” For each profile, you do the following in
SMS
:
•
Select the demand calculation method (thermal, block interval, or synchronized).
•
Select the demand interval (from 5–60 minutes in 1–minute increments) and select the demand subinterval (if applicable).
•
Select the quantities on which to perform the demand calculation. You must also select the units and scale factor for each quantity.
Use the Device Setup > Basic Setup tab in SMS to create the generic demand profiles. For example, you might set up a profile to calculate the
15-minute average value of an analog input. To do this, select a fixed-block demand interval with a 15-minute interval for the analog input.
For each quantity in the demand profile, the circuit monitor stores four values:
•
Partial interval demand value
•
Last completed demand interval value
•
Minimum values (date and time for each is also stored)
•
Peak demand value (date and time for each is also stored)
You can reset the minimum and peak values of the quantities in a generic demand profile by using one of two methods:
•
Use
SMS ( see the
SMS
online help file)
, or
•
Use the command interface.
Command 5115 resets the generic demand profile 1.
Command 5116 resets the generic demand profile 2.
64
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Input Metering Demand
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
The circuit monitor has ten input pulse metering channels. The channels count pulses received from one or more digital inputs assigned to that channel. Each channel requires a consumption pulse weight, consumption scale factor, demand pulse weight, and demand scale factor. The consumption pulse weight is the number of watt-hours or kilowatt-hours per pulse. The consumption scale factor is a factor of 10 multiplier that determines the format of the value. For example, if each incoming pulse represents 125 Wh, and you want consumption data in watt-hours, the consumption pulse weight is 125 and the consumption scale factor is zero.
The resulting calculation is 125 x 10
0
, which equals 125 watt-hours per pulse. If you want the consumption data in kilowatt-hours, the calculation is
125 x 10
-3
, which equals 0.125 kilowatt-hours per pulse.
Time must be taken into account for demand data so you begin by calculating demand pulse weight using the following formula: watts = pulse
× hour
× second
If each incoming pulse represents 125 Wh, using the formula above you get
450,000 watts. If you want demand data in watts, the demand pulse weight is 450 and the demand scale factor is three. The calculation is 450 x 10
3
, which equals 450,000 watts. If you want the demand data in kilowatts, the calculation is 450 x 10
0
, which equals 450 kilowatts.
NOTE: The circuit monitor counts each input transition as a pulse.
Therefore, for an input transition of OFF-to-ON and ON-to-OFF will be counted as two pulses.
For each channel, the circuit monitor maintains the following information:
•
Total consumption
•
Last completed interval demand—calculated demand for the last completed interval.
•
Partial interval demand—demand calculation up to the present point during the interval.
•
Peak demand—highest demand value since the last reset of the input pulse demand. The date and time of the peak demand is also saved.
•
Minimum demand—lowest demand value since the last reset of the input pulse demand. The date and time of the minimum demand is also saved.
For example, you can use channels to verify utility charges. In Figure 4–6,
Channel 1 is adding demand from two utility feeders to track total consumption and demand for the building. This information could be viewed in SMS and compared against the utility charges.
To use the channels feature, first set up the digital inputs from the display or from
SMS
. See “Setting Up I/Os” on page 25 in Operation for instructions.
Then using SMS , you must set the I/O operating mode to Normal and set up the channels. The demand method and interval that you select applies to all channels. See the SMS online help for instructions on device set up of the circuit monitor.
65
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
To Utility Meter on Feeder 1
To Utility Meter on Feeder 2
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Figure 4–6: Input pulse metering example
Building A
Channel 1
Pulses from both inputs are totaled
For all channels
Units: kWh for consumption data
kW for demand data
Fixed block demand with 15 min interval
Channel 2
An SMS table shows the demand calculation results by channel
Pulses from only one input
ENERGY READINGS
The circuit monitor calculates and stores accumulated energy values for real and reactive energy (kWh and kVARh) both into and out of the load, and also accumulates absolute apparent energy.
Table 4–4 lists the energy values the circuit monitor can accumulate.
Table 4–4: Energy Readings
Energy Reading, 3-Phase
Accumulated Energy
Real (Signed/Absolute)
Reactive (Signed/Absolute)
Real (In)
Real (Out)
Reactive (In)
Reactive (Out)
Apparent
Accumulated Energy, Conditional
Real (In) *
Real (Out) *
Reactive (In) *
Reactive (Out) *
Apparent *
Reportable Range
-9,999,999,999,999,999 to
9,999,999,999,999,999 Wh
-9,999,999,999,999,999 to
9,999,999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 Wh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 Wh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 VAh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 Wh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 Wh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 9,999,999,999,999,999 VAh
Shown on the Display
0000.000 kWh to 99,999.99 MWh and
0000.000 to 99,999.99 MVARh
0000.000 kWh to 99,999.99 MWh and
0000.000 to 99,999.99 MVARh
Not shown on the display. Readings are obtained only through the communications link.
66
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
Table 4–4:
Energy Readings (continued)
Accumulated Energy, Incremental
Real (In)
Real (Out)
Reactive (In)
Reactive (Out)
Apparent
0 to 999,999,999,999 Wh
0 to 999,999,999,999 Wh
0 to 999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 999,999,999,999 VAh
0000.000 kWh to 99,999.99 MWh and
0000.000 to 99,999.99 MVARh
Reactive Energy
Quadrant 1 *
Quadrant 2 *
Quadrant 3 *
0 to 999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 999,999,999,999 VARh
Not shown on the display. Readings are obtained only through the communications link.
Quadrant 4 *
0 to 999,999,999,999 VARh
0 to 999,999,999,999 VARh
* Values can be displayed on the screen by creating custom quantities and custom displays.
The circuit monitor can accumulate the energy values shown in Table 4–4 in
one of two modes: signed or unsigned (absolute). In signed mode, the circuit monitor considers the direction of power flow, allowing the magnitude of accumulated energy to increase and decrease. In unsigned mode, the circuit monitor accumulates energy as a positive value, regardless of the direction of power flow. In other words, the energy value increases, even during reverse power flow. The default accumulation mode is unsigned.
You can view accumulated energy from the display. The resolution of the energy value will automatically change through the range of 000.000 kWh to
000,000 MWh (000.000 to 000,000 MVARh), or it can be fixed.
For conditional accumulated energy readings, you can set the real, reactive, and apparent energy accumulation to
OFF
or
ON
when a particular condition occurs. You can do this over the communications link using a command, or from a digital input change. For example, you may want to track accumulated energy values during a particular process that is controlled by a PLC. The circuit monitor stores the date and time of the last reset of conditional energy in nonvolatile memory.
Also, the circuit monitor provides an additional energy reading that is only available over the communications link:
•
Four-quadrant reactive accumulated energy readings. The circuit monitor accumulates reactive energy (kVARh) in four quadrants as
shown in Figure 4–7. The registers operate in unsigned (absolute) mode
in which the circuit monitor accumulates energy as positive.
NOTE: The reactive accumulated energy is not affected by the VAR sign convention and will remain as shown in the image below.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
67
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Figure 4–7: Reactive energy accumulates in four quadrants
Reactive
Power In
Quadrant
2
watts negative (–) vars positive (+) power factor leading (+)
Quadrant
1
watts positive (+) vars positive (+) power factor lagging (–)
Reverse Power Flow
watts negative (–) vars negative (–) power factor lagging (–)
Normal Power Flow
watts positive (+) vars negative (–) power factor leading (+)
Real
Power
In
Quadrant
3
Quadrant
4
POWER ANALYSIS VALUES
68
The circuit monitor provides a number of power analysis values that can be used to detect power quality problems, diagnose wiring problems, and
more. Table 4–5 on page 70 summarizes the power analysis values.
•
THD. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) is a quick measure of the total distortion present in a waveform and is the ratio of harmonic content to the fundamental. It provides a general indication of the “quality” of a waveform. THD is calculated for both voltage and current. The circuit monitor uses the following equation to calculate THD where H is the harmonic distortion:
THD
=
H
2
2
+
2
H
3
H
1
+
2
H
4
+
…
×
100%
•
thd. An alternate method for calculating Total Harmonic Distortion. It considers the total harmonic current and the total rms content rather than fundamental content in the calculation. The circuit monitor calculates thd for both voltage and current. The circuit monitor uses the following equation to calculate thd where H is the harmonic distortion: thd
=
2
H
2
+
2
H
3
+
H
2
+
…
-------------------------------------------------------
100%
Total rms
×
•
TDD. Total Demand Distortion (TDD) is used to evaluate the harmonic voltages and currents between an end user and a power source. The harmonic values are based on a point of common coupling (PCC), which is a common point that each user receives power from the power source. The following equation is used to calculate TDD where I h
is the
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
magnitude of individual harmonic components, h is the harmonic order, and I
L
is the maximum demand load current in register 3233:
TDD
=
255
∑
2
I h h
=
2
---------------
×
100%
I
L
•
K-factor. K-factor is a simple numerical rating used to specify transformers for nonlinear loads. The rating describes a transformer’s ability to serve nonlinear loads without exceeding rated temperature rise limits. The higher the K-factor rating, the better the transformer’s ability to handle the harmonics. The circuit monitor uses the following equation to calculate K-factor where I h
is harmonic current and h is the harmonic order:
K
=
2 h
•
⎝
⎛ 2
SUM I rms h
2 ⎞
⎠
------------------------------
⎞
⎠
•
Displacement Power Factor. Power factor (PF) represents the degree to which voltage and current coming into a load are out of phase. When true power factor is based on the angle between the fundamental components of current and voltage.
•
Harmonic Values. Harmonics can reduce the capacity of the power system. The circuit monitor determines the individual per-phase harmonic magnitudes and angles through the 63rd harmonic for all currents and voltages. The harmonic magnitudes can be formatted as either a percentage of the fundamental (default) or a percentage of the
•
Harmonic Power. Harmonic power is an indication of the nonfundamental components of current and power in the electrical circuit.
The circuit monitor uses the following equation to calculate harmonic power.
Harmonic Power = Overall Power
2
– Fundamental Power
2
•
Distortion Power Factor. Distortion power factor is an indication of the distortion power content of non-linear loads. Linear loads do not contribute to distortion power even when harmonics are present.
Distortion power factor provides a way to describe distortion in terms of its total contribution to apparent power. The circuit monitor uses the following equation to calculate the distortion power factor.
Distortion Power Factor
=
Overall Power Power Factor
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Fundamental Power Power Factor
69
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 4—Metering Capabilities
HARMONIC POWER
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 4–5: Power Analysis Values
Value
THD—Voltage, Current
3-phase, per-phase, neutral thd—Voltage, Current
Reportable Range
0 to 3,276.7%
3-phase, per-phase, neutral
Total Demand Distortion
K-Factor (per phase)
➁
K-Factor Demand (per phase)
➀➁
Crest Factor (per phase)
➀
Displacement P.F. (per phase, 3-phase)
➀
Fundamental Voltages (per phase)
Magnitude
Angle
0 to 3,276.7%
0 to 10,000
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
–0.010 to 1.000 to +0.010
0 to 1,200 kV
0.0 to 359.9°
Fundamental Currents (per phase)
Magnitude 0 to 32,767 A
Angle 0.0 to 359.9°
Fundamental Real Power (per phase, 3-phase)
➀
0 to 32,767 kW
Fundamental Reactive Power (per phase)
➀
0 to 32,767 kVAR
Harmonic Power (per phase, 3-phase)
➀
0 to 32,767 kW
Phase Rotation ABC or CBA
Unbalance (current and voltage)
➀
Individual Harmonic Magnitudes
➀➂
Individual Harmonic Angles
➀➂
Distortion Power
0.0 to 100.0%
0 to 327.67%
0.0° to 359.9°
–32,767 to 32,767
Distortion Power Factor 0 to 1,000
➀
Readings are obtained only through communications.
➁
K-Factor not available at 400Hz.
➂
Harmonic magnitudes and angles through the 63rd harmonic at 50Hz and 60Hz; harmonic magnitudes and angles through the 7th harmonic at 400Hz.
Circuit monitor models 4250 and 4000T calculate harmonic power flows and display them in registers.
At the point of metering, the circuit monitor can determine the magnitude and direction of real (kW), reactive (kvar), and apparent power (kVA) flows up to and including the 40th harmonic. Readings from harmonic power flows can provide valuable information to help you determine the locations and types of harmonic generating loads. Refer to the Master Register List, available at www.powerlogic.com, for registers that contain the harmonic power flow data.
70
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
CHAPTER 5—INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES
I/O OPTIONS
DIGITAL INPUTS
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
The circuit monitor supports a variety of input and output options including:
•
Digital Inputs
•
Analog Inputs
•
Mechanical Relay Outputs
•
Solid State KYZ Pulse Outputs
•
Analog Outputs
The circuit monitor has one KYZ output as standard. You can expand the
I/O capabilities by adding the optional I/O Extender (IOX) and the digital I/O option card (IOC-44).
For module installation instructions and detailed technical specifications, refer to the individual instruction bulletins that ship with the product. For a
list of these publications, see Table 1–2 on page 2 of this bulletin.
Table 5–1 lists the many available I/O options. The I/O options are
explained in detail in the remainder of this section.
Table 5–1: I/O Extender Options
I/O Extender Options Part Number
with no preinstalled I/ Os, accepts up to 8 individual I/O modules with a maximum of 4 analog I/Os
IOX with 4 digital inputs (32 Vdc), 2 digital outputs (60 Vdc),
1 analog output(4–20 mA), and 1 analog input (0–5 Vdc)
IOX2411 with 4 digital inputs (120 Vac) and 4 analog inputs
(4–20 mA)
IOX0404 with 8 digital inputs (120 Vac)
Individual I/O Modules*
Digital I/Os
120 Vac input
IOX08
Part Number
240 Vac input
32 Vdc input (0.2ms turn on) polarized
120 Vac output (3.5A maximum)
200 Vdc output (3.5A maximum)
DI120AC
DI240AC
DI32DC
DO120AC
240 Vac output (3.5A maximum)
60 Vdc output (3.5A maximum)
DO200DC
DO240AC
DO60DC
Analog I/Os
0 to 5 Vdc analog input
4 to 20 mA analog input
4 to 20 mA analog output
AI05
AI420
AO420
* The circuit monitor must be equipped with the I/O Extender (IOX) to install the modules.
The circuit monitor can accept up to 16 digital inputs depending on the I/O accessories you select. Digital inputs are used to detect digital signals. For example, the digital input can be used to determine circuit breaker status, count pulses, or count motor starts. Digital inputs can also be associated
71
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
DEMAND SYNCH PULSE INPUT
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
with an external relay, which can trigger a waveform capture in the circuit monitor. You can log digital input transitions as events in the circuit monitor’s on-board alarm log. The event is date and time stamped with resolution to the millisecond, for sequence of events recording. The circuit monitor counts
OFF
-to-
ON
transitions for each input, and you can reset this value using the command interface.
Digital inputs have four operating modes:
•
Normal—Use the normal mode for simple on/off digital inputs. In normal mode, digital inputs can be used to count KYZ pulses for demand and energy calculation. Using the input pulse demand feature, you can map multiple inputs to the same channel where the circuit monitor can total
pulses from multiple inputs (see“Input Metering Demand” on page 65
in Metering Capabilities for more information). To accurately count
pulses, set the time between transitions from
OFF
to
ON
and
ON
to
OFF to at least 20 milliseconds.
•
Demand Interval Synch Pulse—you can configure any digital input to accept a demand synch pulse from a utility demand meter (see
“Demand Synch Pulse Input” on page 72 for more about this topic). For
each demand profile, you can designate only one input as a demand synch input.
•
Time Synch—you can configure one digital input to receive a signal from a GPS receiver that provides a serial pulse stream in accordance to the DCF-77 format to synchronize the internal clock of the circuit monitor.
•
Conditional Energy Control—you can configure one digital input to
control conditional energy (see “Energy Readings” on page 66 for more
about conditional energy).
To set up a digital input on the I/O extender, you must first define it from the display. From the main menu, select Setup > I/O. Select the appropriate digital input option. For example, if you are using IOX-2411 option of the I/O
Extender, select IOX-2411. For detailed instructions, see “Setting Up I/Os”
on page 25 in Operation. Then using SMS, define the name and operating
mode of the digital input. The name is a 16-character label that identifies the digital input. The operating mode is one of those listed above. See the SMS online help for instructions on device set up of the circuit monitor.
You can configure the circuit monitor to accept a demand synch pulse from an external source such as another demand meter. By accepting demand synch pulses through a digital input, the circuit monitor can make its demand interval “window” match the other meter’s demand interval
“window.” The circuit monitor does this by “watching” the digital input for a pulse from the other demand meter. When it sees a pulse, it starts a new demand interval and calculates the demand for the preceding interval. The circuit monitor then uses the same time interval as the other meter for each
demand calculation. Figure 5–1 illustrates this point. See “Synchronized
Demand” on page 62 for more about demand calculations.
When in demand synch pulse operating mode, the circuit monitor will not start or stop a demand interval without a pulse. The maximum allowable time between pulses is 60 minutes. If 66 minutes (110% of the demand interval) pass before a synch pulse is received, the circuit monitor throws out the demand calculations and begins a new calculation when the next pulse is received. Once in synch with the billing meter, the circuit monitor can be used to verify peak demand charges.
72
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
ANALOG INPUTS
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
Important facts about the circuit monitor’s demand synch feature are listed below:
•
Any installed digital input can be set to accept a demand synch pulse.
•
Each demand system can choose whether to use an external synch pulse, but only one demand synch pulse can be brought into the meter for each demand system. One input can be used to synchronize any combination of the demand systems.
•
The demand synch feature can be set up from
SMS
. See the SMS online help for instructions on device set up of the circuit monitor.
Figure 5–1: Demand synch pulse timing
Normal Demand Mode
External Synch Pulse Demand Timing
Billing Meter
Demand Timing
Billing Meter
Demand Timing
Utility Meter
Synch Pulse
Circuit Monitor
Demand Timing
Circuit Monitor
Demand Timing
(Slaved to Master)
Depending on the I/O modules you select, the circuit monitor can accept
maximum value for each analog input.
For technical specifications and instructions on installing I/O modules, refer
to the instruction bulletin that ships with the I/O (see Table 1–2 on page 2
for a list of these publications). To set up analog inputs, you must first set it up from the display. From the main menu, select Setup > I/O, then select the appropriate analog input option. For example, if you are using the
IOX0404 option of the I/O Extender, select IOX-0404. For detailed
instructions, see “Setting Up I/Os” on page 25. Then, in
SMS
define the following values for each analog input:
•
Name—a 16-character label used to identify the analog input.
•
Units—the units of the monitored analog value (for example, “psi”).
•
Scale factor—multiplies the units by this value (such as tenths or hundredths).
•
Report Range Lower Limit—the value the circuit monitor reports when the input reaches a minimum value. When the input current is below the lowest valid reading, the circuit monitor reports the lower limit.
•
Report Range Upper Limit—the value the circuit monitor reports when the input reaches the maximum value. When the input current is above highest valid reading, the circuit monitor reports the upper limit.
For instructions on setting up analog inputs in
SMS
, see device set up of the circuit monitor in the SMS online help.
73
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
Analog Input Example
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Figure 5–2 shows an analog input example. In this example, the analog input
has been configured as follows:
— Upper Limit: 500
— Lower Limit: 100
— Units: psi
Table 5–2 shows circuit monitor readings at various input currents.
Table 5–2: Sample register readings for analog inputs
4
8
Input Current (mA)
3 (invalid)
10
20
21 (invalid)
Circuit Monitor Reading (psi)
100
100
200
250
500
500
Figure 5–2: Analog input example
Circuit Monitor
Reading
(
Upper
Limit
)
500 psi
(
Lower
Limit
)
100 psi
4 mA
Minimum
(
Input Current
)
20 mA
Maximum
(
Input Current
)
Input Current
74
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
RELAY OUTPUT OPERATING MODES
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
Before we describe the 11 available relay operating modes, it is important to understand the difference between a relay configured for remote (external) control and a relay configured for circuit monitor (internal) control.
Each relay output defaults to external control, but you can choose whether the relay is set to external or internal control:
•
Remote (external) control—the relay is controlled either from a
PC using SMS or a programmable logic controller using commands via communications.
•
Circuit monitor (internal) control—the relay is controlled by the circuit monitor in response to a set-point controlled alarm condition, or as a pulse initiator output. Once you’ve set up a relay for circuit monitor control, you can no longer operate the relay remotely. However, you can temporarily override the relay, using
SMS
.
NOTE: If any basic setup parameters or I/O setup parameters are modified, all relay outputs will be de-energized.
The 11 relay operating modes are as follows:
•
Normal
— Remotely Controlled: Energize the relay by issuing a command from a remote
PC
or programmable controller. The relay remains energized until a command to de-energize is issued from the remote
PC or programmable controller, or until the circuit monitor loses control power. When control power is restored, the relay will be reenergized.
— Circuit Monitor Controlled: When an alarm condition assigned to the relay occurs, the relay is energized. The relay is not de-energized until all alarm conditions assigned to the relay have dropped out, the circuit monitor loses control power, or the alarms are over-ridden using SMS software. If the alarm condition is still true when the circuit monitor regains control power, the relay will be re-energized.
•
Latched
— Remotely Controlled: Energize the relay by issuing a command from a remote PC or programmable controller. The relay remains energized until a command to de-energize is issued from a remote
PC or programmable controller, or until the circuit monitor loses control power. When control power is restored, the relay will not be re-energized.
— Circuit Monitor Controlled: When an alarm condition assigned to the relay occurs, the relay is energized. The relay remains energized— even after all alarm conditions assigned to the relay have dropped out—until a command to de-energize is issued from a remote PC or programmable controller, until the high priority alarm log is cleared from the display, or until the circuit monitor loses control power.
When control power is restored, the relay will not be re-energized if the alarm condition is not TRUE.
•
Timed
— Remotely Controlled: Energize the relay by issuing a command from a remote PC or programmable controller. The relay remains energized until the timer expires, or until the circuit monitor loses control power. If a new command to energize the relay is issued before the timer expires, the timer restarts. If the circuit monitor loses control power, the relay will be re-energized when
75
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
control power is restored and the timer will reset to zero and begin timing again.
— Circuit Monitor Controlled: When an alarm condition assigned to the relay occurs, the relay is energized. The relay remains energized for the duration of the timer. When the timer expires, the relay will deenergize and remain de-energized. If the relay is on and the circuit monitor loses control power, the relay will be re-energized when control power is restored and the timer will reset to zero and begin timing again.
•
End Of Power Demand Interval
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a synch pulse to another device. The output operates in timed mode using the timer setting and turns on at the end of a power demand interval. It turns off when the timer expires. Because of it’s long life, this mode should be used with solid state relay outputs.
•
Absolute kWh Pulse
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a pulse initiator with a user-defined number of kWh per pulse. In this mode, both forward and reverse real energy are treated as additive (as in a tie circuit breaker).
•
Absolute kVARh Pulse
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a pulse initiator with a user-defined number of kVARh per pulse. In this mode, both forward and reverse reactive energy are treated as additive (as in a tie circuit breaker).
•
kVAh Pulse
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a pulse initiator with a user-defined number of kVAh per pulse. Since kVA has no sign, the kVAh pulse has only one mode.
•
kWh In Pulse
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a pulse initiator with a user-defined number of kWh per pulse. In this mode, only the kWh flowing into the load is considered.
•
kVARh In Pulse
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a pulse initiator with a user-defined number of kVARh per pulse. In this mode, only the kVARh flowing into the load is considered.
•
kWh Out Pulse
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a pulse initiator with a user-defined number of kWh per pulse. In this mode, only the kWh flowing out of the load is considered.
•
kVARh Out Pulse
This mode assigns the relay to operate as a pulse initiator with a user-defined number of kVARh per pulse. In this mode, only the kVARh flowing out of the load is considered.
76
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
MECHANICAL RELAY OUTPUTS
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
The optional Input/Output Card IOC44 provides three Form-C, 10 A mechanical relays that can be used to open or close circuit breakers, annunciate alarms, and more.
The mechanical output relays of the circuit monitor can be configured to operate in one of 11 operating modes:
•
Normal
•
Latched (electrically held)
•
Timed
•
End of power demand interval
•
Absolute kWh pulse
•
Absolute kVARh pulse
• kVAh pulse
• kWh in pulse
• kVARh in pulse
• kWh out pulse
• kVARh out pulse
See the previous section “Relay Output Operating Modes” on page 75 for a
description of the modes.
The last seven modes in the list above are for pulse initiator applications. All
Series 4000 Circuit Monitors are equipped with one solid-state
KYZ
pulse output rated at 96 mA and an additional KYZ pulse output is available on the
IOC44 card. The solid-state
KYZ
output provides the long life—billions of operations—required for pulse initiator applications. The mechanical relay outputs have limited lives: 10 million operations under no load; 100,000 under load. For maximum life, use the solid-state KYZ pulse output for pulse
initiation, except when a rating higher than 96 mA is required. See “Solid-
State KYZ Pulse Output” on page 78 for a description of the solid-state
KYZ pulse output.
To set up a mechanical relay output, from the Main Menu, select Setup >
I/O
. Select input option IOC44. For detailed instructions, see “Setting Up
SMS , you must define the following values for each mechanical relay output:
•
Name—A 16-character label used to identify the digital output.
•
Mode—Select one of the operating modes listed above.
•
Pulse Weight—You must set the pulse weight, the multiplier of the unit being measured, if you select any of the pulse modes (last 7 listed above).
•
Timer—You must set the timer if you select the timed mode or end of power demand interval mode (in seconds).
•
Control—You must set the relay to be controlled either remotely or internally (from the circuit monitor) if you select the normal, latched, or timed mode.
For instructions on setting up digital I/O s in SMS , see the SMS online help on device set up of the circuit monitor.
NOTE: The IOC44 can be set up using the display or SMS. The IOX must be identified using the display, then set up using the display or SMS.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
77
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
Setpoint-Controlled Relay Functions
SOLID-STATE KYZ PULSE OUTPUT
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The circuit monitor can detect over 100 alarm conditions, including over/under conditions, digital input changes, phase unbalance conditions,
and more (see Alarms on page 83 for more about alarms). Using
SMS
, you can configure a relay to operate when an alarm condition is true. For example, you could set up the three relays on the
IOC44
card to operate at each occurrence of “Undervoltage Phase A.” Then, each time the alarm condition occurs—that is, each time the setpoints and time delays assigned to Undervoltage Phase A are satisfied—the circuit monitor automatically operates relays R1, R2, and R3 according to their configured mode of
operation. See “Relay Output Operating Modes” on page 75 for a
description of the operating modes.
Also, you can assign multiple alarm conditions to a relay. For example, relay
AR1 on the IOC44 card could have “Undervoltage Phase A” and
“Undervoltage Phase B” assigned to it. The relay would operate whenever either condition occurred.
NOTE: Setpoint-controlled relay operation can be used for some types of
non-time-critical relaying. For more information, see “Setpoint-Controlled
This section describes the pulse output capabilities of the circuit monitor.
For instructions on wiring the KYZ pulse output, see “Wiring the Solid-State
KYZ Output” in the Wiring section of the installation manual.
The circuit monitor is equipped with one solid-state
KYZ
pulse output located near the option card slots. The IOC44 option card also has a solidstate KYZ output. The solid-state relays provides the extremely long life— billions of operations—required for pulse initiator applications.
The
KYZ
output is a Form-C contact with a maximum rating of 100 mA.
Because most pulse initiator applications feed solid-state receivers with low burdens, this 100 mA rating is adequate for most applications. For applications where a higher rating is required, the IOC44 card provides
3 relays with 10 ampere ratings. Use
SMS
or the display to configure any of the 10 ampere relays as a pulse initiator output. Keep in mind that the 10 ampere relays are mechanical relays with limited life—10 million operations under no load; 100,000 under load.
To set the kilowatthour-per-pulse value, use SMS or the display. When setting the kWh/pulse value, set the value based on a 3-wire pulse output.
For instructions on calculating the correct value, see “Calculating the
Kilowatthour-Per-Pulse Value” on page 80.
The circuit monitor can be used in 2-wire or 3-wire pulse initiator applications. Each of these applications is described in the sections that follow.
The KYZ pulse output can be configured to operate in one of 11 operating
modes. See “Relay Output Operating Modes” on page 75 for a description
of the modes.
The setup in
SMS
or at the circuit monitor display is the same as a
SMS
.
78
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
2-Wire Pulse Initiator
3-Wire Pulse Initiator
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
Most digital inputs in energy management systems use only two of the three wires provided with a KYZ pulse initiator. This is called a 2-wire pulse
initiator application. Figure 5–3 shows a pulse train from a 2-wire pulse
initiator application.
In a 2-wire application, the pulse train looks like the alternating open and closed states of a Form-A contact. Most 2-wire pulse initiator applications use a Form-C contact, but tie into only one side of the Form-C contact where the pulse is the transition from OFF to ON of that side of the Form-C
relay. In Figure 5–3, the transitions are marked as 1 and 2. Each transition
represents the time when the relay transitions from KZ to KY. Each time the relay transitions, the receiver counts a pulse. The circuit monitor can deliver up to 25 pulses per second in a 2-wire application.
Figure 5–3: Two-wire pulse train
Y
K
Z
1 2
KY
3
KZ
Δ
T
Some applications require the use of all three wires provided with the KYZ
pulse initiator. This is called a 3-wire pulse initiator application. Figure 5–4
shows a pulse train for a 3-wire pulse initiator application.
Three-wire KYZ pulses are the transitions between KY and KZ. These
transitions are the alternate contact closures of a Form-C contact. In Figure
5–4, the transitions are marked as 1, 2, 3, and 4. The receiver counts a
pulse at each transition. That is, each time the Form-C contact changes state from KY to KZ, or from KZ to KY, the receiver counts a pulse.The circuit monitor can deliver up to 50 pulses per second in a 3-wire application.
Figure 5–4: Three-wire pulse train
Y
K
Z
1 2 3
KY
4 5 6
KZ
Δ
T
79
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
CALCULATING THE KILOWATTHOUR-
PER-PULSE VALUE
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
This section shows an example of how to calculate kilowatthours per pulse.
To calculate this value, first determine the highest kW value you can expect and the required pulse rate. In this example, the following assumptions are made:
•
The metered load should not exceed 1600 kW.
•
About two KYZ pulses per second should occur at full scale.
Step 1: Convert 1600 kW load into kWh/second.
(1600 kW) (1 Hr) = 1600 kWh
(1600 kWh)
1 hour
(1600 kWh)
3600 seconds
= “X” kWh
1 second
= “X” kWh
1 second
X = 1600/3600 = 0.4444 kWh/second
Step 2: Calculate the kWh required per pulse.
0.4444 kWh/second
2 pulses/second
= 0.2222 kWh/pulse
Step 3: Round to nearest hundredth, since the circuit monitor only accepts
0.01 kWh increments.
Ke = 0.22 kWh/pulse
Summary:
•
3-wire application—0.22 kWh/pulse provides approximately 2 pulses per second at full scale.
•
2-wire application—0.11 kWh/pulse provides approximately 2 pulses per second at full scale. (To convert to the kWh/pulse required for a 2-wire application, divide Ke by 2. This is necessary because the circuit monitor
Form C relay generates two pulses—KY and KZ—for every pulse that is counted.)
80
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
ANALOG OUTPUTS
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
This section describes the circuit monitor’s analog output capabilities. For technical specifications and instructions on installing the I/O Extender or analog output modules, refer to the instruction bulletin that ships with the I/O
(see Table 1–2 on page 2 for a list of these publications).
To set up analog outputs, you must first define it from the display. From the main menu, select Setup > I/O. Select the appropriate analog output option.
For example, if you are using the IOX0404 option of the I/O Extender, select
IOX0404. For detailed instructions, see “Setting Up I/Os” on page 25. Then
using SMS , you must define the following values for each analog output:
•
Name—A 16-character label used to identify the output. Default names are assigned, but can be customized
•
Output register—The circuit monitor register assigned to the analog output.
•
Lower Limit—The value equivalent to the minimum output current. When the register value is below the lower limit, the circuit monitor outputs the minimum output current.
•
Upper Limit—The value equivalent to the maximum output current.
When the register value is above the upper limit, the circuit monitor outputs the maximum output current.
For instructions on setting up an analog output in
SMS
, see the
SMS
online help on device set up of the circuit monitor.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Each analog output represents an individual 2-wire current loop; therefore, use an isolated receiver for each individual analog output on the I/O Extender (IOX).
Failure to observe this instruction can result in equipment damage.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
81
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 5—Input/Output Capabilities
Analog Output Example
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Figure 5–5 illustrates the relationship between the output range of current
(in milliamperes) and the upper and lower limit of power usage (real power in kW). In this example, the analog output has been configured as follows:
— Register Number: 1143 (Real Power, 3-Phase Total)
— Lower Limit: 100 kW
— Upper Limit: 500 kW
Table 5–3 shows the output current at various register readings.
Table 5–3: Sample register readings for analog output
Register Reading (kW) Output Current (mA)
50 4
100 4
200 8
250 10
500 20
550 20
Figure 5–5: Analog output example
Output
Current
Maximum
(
Output Current
)
20 mA
(
Minimum
Output Current
)
4 mA
100 kW
(
Lower
Limit
)
500 kW
(
Upper
Limit
)
Real Power, 3Ø Total
(from register 1143)
82
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CHAPTER 6—ALARMS
ABOUT ALARMS
Alarms Groups
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
The circuit monitor can detect over 100 alarm conditions, including over or under conditions, digital input changes, phase unbalance conditions, and more. It also maintains a counter for each alarm to keep track of the total number of occurrences. A complete list of default alarm configurations are
described in Table 6–3 on page 91. In addition, you can set up your own
custom alarms and set up relays to operate on alarm conditions.
When one or more alarm conditions are true, the circuit monitor will execute a task automatically. Using SMS or the display, you can set up each alarm condition to perform these tasks:
•
Force data log entries in up to 14 user-defined data log files.
See Logging on page 101 for more about data logging.
•
Perform event captures. See Waveform and Event Capture on page
107 for more about event recording.
•
Operate relays. Using
SMS
you can assign one or more relays to operate when an alarm condition is true. See the SMS online help for more about this topic.
Whether you are using a default alarm or creating a custom alarm, you first choose the alarm group that is appropriate for the application. Each alarm condition is assigned to one of these alarm groups:
•
Standard—Standard alarms have a detection rate of 1 second and are useful for detecting conditions such as over current and under voltage.
Up to 80 alarms can be set up in this alarm group
•
High Speed—High speed alarms have a detection rate of 100 milliseconds and are useful for detecting voltage sags and swells lasting only a few cycles. Up to 20 alarms can be set up in this group.
•
Disturbance—Disturbance alarms have a detection rate one cycle and are useful for detecting voltage sags and swells. Up to 20 alarms can be
set up in this group. See Disturbance Monitoring on page 113 for more
about disturbance monitoring.
•
Digital—Digital alarms are triggered by an exception such as the transition of a digital input or the end of an incremental energy interval.
Up to 40 alarms can be set up in this group.
•
Boolean—Boolean alarms use Boolean logic to combine up to four enabled alarms. You can choose from the Boolean logic operands:
AND, NAND, OR, NOR , or XOR to combine your alarms. Up to 15 alarms can be set up in this group.
•
Waveshape—Waveshape alarms identify abnormalities by comparing
Use either SMS or the display to set up any of the alarms.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
83
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
Setpoint-Driven Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Many of the alarm conditions require that you define setpoints. This includes all alarms for over, under, and phase unbalance alarm conditions. Other alarm conditions such as digital input transitions and phase reversals do not require setpoints. For those alarm conditions that require setpoints, you must define the following information:
•
Pickup Setpoint
•
Pickup Delay (depending on the alarm group, you choose the time in seconds, 100 ms increments, or cycles)
•
Dropout Setpoint
•
Dropout Delay (depending on the alarm group, you choose the time in seconds, 100 ms increments, or cycles)
NOTE: Alarms with both Pickup and Dropout setpoints set to zero are invalid.
To understand how the circuit monitor handles setpoint-driven alarms, see
Figure 6–2. Figure 6–1 shows what the actual alarm Log entries for Figure
6–2 might look like, as displayed by
SMS
.
NOTE: The software does not actually display the codes in parentheses—
EV1, EV2, Max1, Max2. These are references to the codes in Figure 6–2.
(EV2)
Figure 6–1: Sample alarm log entry
(Max2)
(EV1)
(Max1)
Max1
Figure 6–2: How the circuit monitor handles setpoint-driven alarms
Max2
Pickup Setpoint
Dropout Setpoint
84
Δ
T
Pickup Delay
EV1
Alarm Period
Δ
T
Dropout Delay
EV2
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Priorities
Alarm Levels
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
EV1—The circuit monitor records the date and time that the pickup setpoint and time delay were satisfied, and the maximum value reached (Max1) during the pickup delay period (
Δ
T). Also, the circuit monitor performs any tasks assigned to the event such as waveform captures or forced data log entries.
EV2—The circuit monitor records the date and time that the dropout setpoint and time delay were satisfied, and the maximum value reached
(Max2) during the alarm period.
The circuit monitor also stores a correlation sequence number ( CSN ) for each event (such as Under Voltage Phase A Pickup, Under Voltage Phase
A Dropout). The CSN lets you relate pickups and dropouts in the alarm log.
You can sort pickups and dropouts by
CSN
to correlate the pickups and dropouts of a particular alarm. The pickup and dropout entries of an alarm will have the same
CSN
. You can also calculate the duration of an event by looking at pickups and dropouts with the same CSN .
Each alarm also has a priority level. Use the priorities to distinguish between events that require immediate action and those that do not require action.
•
High priority—if a high priority alarm occurs, the display informs you in two ways: the LED on the display flashes until you acknowledge the alarm and a message displays while the alarm is active.
•
Medium priority—if a medium priority alarm occurs, the LED flashes and a message displays only while the alarm is active. Once the alarm becomes inactive, the LED stops flashing.
•
Low priority—if a low priority alarm occurs, the LED on the display flashes only while the alarm is active. No alarm message is displayed.
•
No priority—if an alarm is setup with no priority, no visible representation will appear on the display. Alarms with no priority are not
entered in the Alarm Log. See Logging for alarm logging information.
If multiple alarms with different priorities are active at the same time, the display shows the alarm message for the last alarm that occurred. For instructions on setting up alarms from the circuit monitor display, see
“Setting Up and Editing Alarms” on page 22.
From the display or SMS , multiple alarms can be set up for one particular quantity (parameter) to create alarm “levels”. You can take different actions depending on the severity of the alarm.
For example, you could set up two alarms for kW Demand. A default alarm already exists for kW Demand (no. 26 in the alarm list), but you could create another custom alarm for kW Demand, selecting different pickup points for it. The custom kW Demand alarm, once created, will appear in the standard alarm list. For illustration purposes, let’s set the default kW Demand alarm to 120 kW and the new custom alarm to 150 kW. One alarm named kW
Demand ; the other kW Demand 150kW as shown in Figure 6–3. Note that if
you choose to set up two alarms for the same quantity, use slightly different names to distinguish which alarm is active. The display can hold up to 15 characters for each name. You can create up to 10 alarm levels for each quantity.
85
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Figure 6–3: Two alarms set up for the same quantity with different pickup and dropout set points
kW Demand
CUSTOM ALARMS
SETPOINT-CONTROLLED RELAY
FUNCTIONS
86
150
140
130
120
100
Alarm #43 Pick Up
Alarm #26 Pick Up
Alarm # 43 Drop Out
Alarm #26 Drop Out
Demand OK Approaching
Peak Demand
Peak Demand
Exceeded kW Demand (default)
Alarm #26 kW Demand with pickup of 120 kWd, medium priority
Below Peak
Demand
Demand OK
Time kW Demand 150kW (custom)
Alarm #43 kW Demand with pickup of 150 kWd, high priority
The circuit monitor has many pre-defined alarms, but you can also set up your own custom alarms. For example, you may need to alarm on the ONto-OFF transition of a digital input. To create this type of custom alarm:
1. Select the appropriate alarm group (digital in this case).
2. Select the type of alarm (described in Table 6–4 on page 93).
3. Give the alarm a name.
After creating a custom alarm, you can configure it by applying priorities, setting pickups and dropouts (if applicable), and so forth. For instructions on
creating custom alarms, see “Creating a New Custom Alarm” on page 21.
NOTE: The circuit monitor will automatically create alarms for the IOC44 and the IOX when the modules are identified. These are OFF-to-ON alarms.
A circuit monitor can mimic the functions of certain motor management devices to detect and respond to conditions such as phase loss, undervoltage, or reverse phase relays. While the circuit monitor is not a primary protective device, it can detect abnormal conditions and respond by operating one or more Form-C output contacts. These outputs can be used to operate an alarm horn or bell to annunciate the alarm condition.
NOTE: The circuit monitor is not designed for use as a primary protective relay. While its setpoint-controlled functions may be acceptable for certain applications, it should not be considered a substitute for proper circuit protection.
If you determine that the circuit monitor’s performance is acceptable for the application, the output contacts can be used to mimic some functions of a motor management device. When deciding if the circuit monitor is acceptable for these applications, keep the following points in mind:
•
Circuit monitors require control power to operate properly.
•
Circuit monitors may take up to 5 seconds after control power is applied before setpoint-controlled functions are activated. If this is too long, a reliable source of control power is required.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Types of Setpoint-Controlled Relay
Functions
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
•
When control power is interrupted for more than approximately 100 milliseconds, the circuit monitor releases all energized output contacts.
•
Standard setpoint-controlled functions may take 1–2 seconds to operate, in addition to the intended delay.
•
A password is required to program the circuit monitor’s setpoint controlled relay functions.
•
Changing certain setup parameters after installation may operate relays in a manner inconsistent with the requirements of the application.
For instructions on configuring setpoint-controlled alarms or relays from the
circuit monitor’s display, see “Setting Up and Editing Alarms” on page 22.
The types of available alarms are described in Table 6–3 on page 91.
This section describes some common motor management functions to which the following information applies:
•
Values that are too large to fit into the display may require scale factors.
•
Relays can be configured as normal, latched, or timed. See “Relay
Output Operating Modes” on page 75 for more information.
•
When the alarm occurs, the circuit monitor operates any specified relays. There are two ways to release relays that are in latched mode:
— Issue a command to de-energize a relay, or
— Acknowledge the alarm in the high priority log to release the relays from latched mode. From the main menu of the display, select View
Alarms > High Priority Log to view and acknowledge
unacknowledged alarms. See “Viewing Alarms” on page 45 for
detailed instructions.
The list that follows shows the types of alarms available for some common motor management functions:
NOTE: Voltage base alarm setpoints depend on your system configuration.
Alarm setpoints for 3-wire systems are V
L-L
values while 4-wire systems are
V
L-N
values.
Undervoltage:
Pickup and dropout setpoints are entered in volts. The per-phase undervoltage alarm occurs when the per-phase voltage is equal to or below the pickup setpoint long enough to satisfy the specified pickup delay (in seconds). The undervoltage alarm clears when the phase voltage remains above the dropout setpoint for the specified dropout delay period.
Overvoltage:
Pickup and dropout setpoints are entered in volts. The per-phase overvoltage alarm occurs when the per-phase voltage is equal to or above the pickup setpoint long enough to satisfy the specified pickup delay (in seconds). The overvoltage alarm clears when the phase voltage remains below the dropout setpoint for the specified dropout delay period.
Unbalance Current:
Pickup and dropout setpoints are entered in tenths of percent, based on the percentage difference between each phase current with respect to the average of all phase currents. For example, enter an unbalance of 7% as
70. The unbalance current alarm occurs when the phase current deviates from the average of the phase currents, by the percentage pickup setpoint, for the specified pickup delay. The alarm clears when the percentage
87
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
difference between the phase current and the average of all phases remains below the dropout setpoint for the specified dropout delay period.
Unbalance Voltage:
Pickup and dropout setpoints are entered in tenths of percent, based on the percentage difference between each phase voltage with respect to the average of all phase voltages. For example, enter an unbalance of 7% as 70.
The unbalance voltage alarm occurs when the phase voltage deviates from the average of the phase voltages, by the percentage pickup setpoint, for the specified pickup delay. The alarm clears when the percentage difference between the phase voltage and the average of all phases remains below the dropout setpoint for the specified dropout delay (in seconds).
Phase Loss—Current:
Pickup and dropout setpoints are entered in amperes. The phase loss current alarm occurs when any current value (but not all current values) is equal to or below the pickup setpoint for the specified pickup delay (in seconds). The alarm clears when one of the following is true:
•
All of the phases remain above the dropout setpoint for the specified dropout delay, or
•
All of the phases drop below the phase loss pickup setpoint.
If all of the phase currents are equal to or below the pickup setpoint, during the pickup delay, the phase loss alarm will not activate. This is considered an under current condition. It should be handled by configuring the under current protective functions.
Phase Loss—Voltage:
Pickup and dropout setpoints are entered in volts. The phase loss voltage alarm occurs when any voltage value (but not all voltage values) is equal to or below the pickup setpoint for the specified pickup delay (in seconds). The alarm clears when one of the following is true:
•
All of the phases remain above the dropout setpoint for the specified dropout delay (in seconds), OR
•
All of the phases drop below the phase loss pickup setpoint.
If all of the phase voltages are equal to or below the pickup setpoint, during the pickup delay, the phase loss alarm will not activate. This is considered an under voltage condition. It should be handled by configuring the under voltage protective functions.
Reverse Power:
Pickup and dropout setpoints are entered in kilowatts or kVARS. The reverse power alarm occurs when the power flows in a negative direction and remains at or below the negative pickup value for the specified pickup delay (in seconds). The alarm clears when the power reading remains above the dropout setpoint for the specified dropout delay (in seconds).
Phase Reversal:
Pickup and dropout setpoints and delays do not apply to phase reversal.
The phase reversal alarm occurs when the phase voltage rotation differs from the default phase rotation. The circuit monitor assumes that an ABC phase rotation is normal. If a CBA phase rotation is normal, the user must change the circuit monitor’s phase rotation from ABC (default) to CBA. To change the phase rotation from the display, from the main menu select
88
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
SCALE FACTORS
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
Setup > Meter > Advanced. For more information about changing the phase
rotation setting of the circuit monitor, refer to “Advanced Meter Setup” on page 39.
A scale factor is the multiplier expressed as a power of 10. For example, a multiplier of 10 is represented as a scale factor of 1, since 10
1
=10; a multiplier of 100 is represented as a scale factor of 2, since 10
2
=100. This allows you to make larger values fit into the register. Normally, you do not need to change scale factors. If you are creating custom alarms, you need to understand how scale factors work so that you do not overflow the register with a number larger than what the register can hold. When
SMS
is used to set up alarms, it automatically handles the scaling of pickup and dropout setpoints. When creating a custom alarm using the circuit monitor’s display, do the following:
•
Determine how the corresponding metering value is scaled, and
•
Take the scale factor into account when entering alarm pickup and dropout settings.
Pickup and dropout settings must be integer values in the range of -32,767 to +32,767. For example, to set up an under voltage alarm for a 138 kV nominal system, decide upon a setpoint value and then convert it into an integer between -32,767 and +32,767. If the under voltage setpoint were
125,000 V, this would typically be converted to 12500 x 10 and entered as a setpoint of 12500.
Six scale groups are defined (A through F). The scale factor is preset for all
factory-configured alarms. Table 6–1 lists the available scale factors for
each of the scale groups. If you need either an extended range or more resolution, select any of the available scale factors to suit your need.
Table 6–1: Scale Groups
Scale Group
Scale Group A—Phase Current
Scale Group B—Neutral Current
Scale Group C—Ground Current
Measurement Range
Amperes
0–327.67 A
0–3,276.7 A
0–32,767 A
0–327.67 kA
Amperes
0–327.67 A
0–3,276.7 A
0–32,767 A
0–327.67 kA
Amperes
0–327.67 A
0–3,276.7 A
0–32,767 A
0–327.67 kA
Scale
Factor
–2
–1
0 (default)
1
–2
–1
0 (default)
1
–2
–1
0 (default)
1
89
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 6–1:
Scale Groups (continued)
Scale Group Measurement Range
Scale
Factor
Scale Group D—Voltage, L–L Voltage
0–3,276.7 V
0–32,767 V
0–327.67 kV
0–3,276.7 kV
1
2
–1
0 (default)
Scale Group E—
Neutral Voltage, L–N, N–G
Voltage
0–3,276.7 V
0–32,767 V
0–327.67 kV
0–3,276.7 kV
Scale Group F—Power kW, kVAR, kVA Power
0–32.767 kW, kVAR, kVA
0–327.67 kW, kVAR, kVA
–3
–2
0–3,276.7 kW, kVAR, kVA –1
0–32,767 kW, kVAR, kVA 0 (default)
0–327.67 MW, MVAR, MVA 1
0–3,276.7 MW, MVAR, MVA 2
0–32,767 MW, MVAR, MVA 3
1
2
–1 (default)
0
SCALING ALARM SETPOINTS
90
This section is for users who do not have SMS and must set up alarms from the circuit monitor display. It explains how to scale alarm setpoints.
When the circuit monitor is equipped with a display, the display area is 4 x
20 characters, which limits the displaying of most metered quantities to five characters (plus a positive or negative sign). The display will also show the engineering units applied to that quantity.
To determine the proper scaling of an alarm setpoint, view the register number for the associated scale group. The scale factor is the number in the
Dec column for that register. For example, the register number for Scale D to Phase Volts is 3212. If the number in the Dec column is 1, the scale factor is 10 (10
1
=10). Remember that scale factor 1 in Table 6–1 on page 89 for
Scale Group D is measured in kV. Therefore, to define an alarm setpoint of
125 kV, enter 12.5 because 12.5 multiplied by 10 is 125. Table 6–2 lists the
scale groups and their register numbers.
Table 6–2: Scale Group Register Numbers
Scale Group
Scale Group A—Phase Current
Scale Group B—Neutral Current
Scale Group C—Ground Current
Register Number
3209
3210
3211
Scale Group D—Voltage, L–L
Scale Group E—
Neutral Voltage, L–N, N–G
3212
3213
Scale Group F—Power kW, kVAR, kVA 3214
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
ALARM CONDITIONS AND ALARM
NUMBERS
Table 6–3: List of Default Alarms by Alarm Number
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
02
03
04
05
Alarm
Number
Alarm Description
Standard Speed Alarms (1 Second)
01 Over Current Phase A
Over Current Phase B
Over Current Phase C
Over Current Neutral
Over Current Ground
Under Current Phase A
Under Current Phase B
Under Current Phase C
Current Unbalance, Max
Current Loss
Over Voltage Phase A–N
Over Voltage Phase B–N
Over Voltage Phase C–N
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
Over Voltage Phase A–B
Over Voltage Phase B–C
Over Voltage Phase C–A
Under Voltage Phase A
Under Voltage Phase B
Under Voltage Phase C
Under Voltage Phase A–B
Under Voltage Phase B–C
22 Under Voltage Phase C–A
23 Voltage Unbalance L–N, Max
*
Alarm Types are described in Table 6–4 on page 93.
Abbreviated
Display Name
Over Ia
Over Ib
Over Ic
Over In
Over Ig
Under Ia
Under Ib
Under Ic
I Unbal Max
Current Loss
Over Van
Over Vbn
Over Vcn
Over Vab
Over Vbc
Over Vca
Under Van
Under Vbn
Under Vcn
Under Vab
Under Vbc
Under Vca
V Unbal L-N Max
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
This section lists the circuit monitor’s predefined alarm conditions. For each alarm condition, the following information is provided.
•
Alarm No.—a position number indicating where an alarm falls in the list.
•
Alarm Description—a brief description of the alarm condition
•
Abbreviated Display Name—an abbreviated name that describes the alarm condition, but is limited to 15 characters that fit in the window of the circuit monitor’s display.
•
Test Register—the register number that contains the value (where applicable) that is used as the basis for a comparison to alarm pickup and dropout settings.
•
Units—the unit that applies to the pickup and dropout settings.
•
Scale Group—the scale group that applies to the test register’s
metering value (A–F). For a description of scale groups, see “Scale
•
Alarm Type—a reference to a definition that provides details on the operation and configuration of the alarm. For a description of alarm
types, refer to Table 6–4 on page 93.
Table 6–3 lists the preconfigured alarms by alarm number.
Test
Register
Units
1110
3262
1124
1125
1126
1120
1121
1122
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1100
1101
1102
1124
1125
1126
1120
1121
1122
1136
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Tenths %
Amperes
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Tenths %
91
Scale
Group
Alarm
Type *
D
D
D
D
D
D
—
A
A
A
C
A
A
B
A
A
D
D
—
D
D
D
D
010
010
010
010
010
053
010
010
010
020
020
020
010
010
010
010
020
020
020
020
020
020
010
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
Table 6–3:
List of Default Alarms by Alarm Number (continued)
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
02
03
04
05
Alarm
Number
24
25
26
27
28
29
Alarm Description
Voltage Unbalance L–L, Max
Voltage Loss (loss of A,B,C, but not all)
Phase Reversal
Over kVA Demand
30
31
32
33
Over kW Demand
Over kVAR Demand
Over Frequency
Under Frequency
34
35
36
37
Lagging true power factor
Leading true power factor
Lagging displacement power factor
Leading displacement power factor
38
39
40
41
Over Current Demand Phase A
Over Current Demand Phase B
Over Current Demand Phase C
Over THD Voltage A–N
42
43
44
45-80
Over THD Voltage B–N
Over THD Voltage C–N
Over THD Voltage A–B
Over THD Voltage B–C
Over THD Voltage C–A
Reserved for custom alarms.
High Speed Alarms (100 ms)
01 Over Current A
Over Current B
Over Current C
Over Current N
Over Current G
Over Voltage A–N
Over Voltage B–N
Over Voltage C–N
Over Voltage A-B
Over Voltage B-C
Over Voltage C-A
Over Voltage N-G
Under Voltage A–N
14
15
16
17
Under Voltage B–N
Under Voltage C–N
Under Voltage A-B
Under Voltage B–C
18 Under Voltage C–A
19-20 Reserved for custom alarms
*
Alarm Types are described in Table 6–4 on page 93.
Abbreviated
Display Name
V Unbal L-L Max
Voltage Loss
Phase Rev
Over kVA Dmd
Over kW Dmd
Over kVAR Dmd
Over Freq
Under Freq
Lag True PF
Lead True PF
Lag Disp PF
Lead Disp PF
Over Ia Dmd
Over Ib Dmd
Over Ic Dmd
Over THD Van
Over THD Vbn
Over THD Vcn
Over THD Vab
Over THD Vbc
Over THD Vca
—
Over Ia HS
Over Ib HS
Over Ic HS
Over In HS
Over Ig HS
Over Van HS
Over Vbn HS
Over Vcn HS
Over Vab HS
Over Vbc HS
Over Vca HS
Over Vng HS
Under Van HS
Under Vbn HS
Under Vcn HS
Under Vab HS
Under Vbc HS
Under Vca HS
—
92
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
1020
1021
1022
1027
1024
1025
1026
1020
1,000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1024
1025
1026
1021
1022
—
1981
1207
1208
1209
1211
1212
1213
—
1180
1180
1163
1163
1171
1171
1961
1971
Test
Register
1132
3262
3228
2181
2151
2166
Units
Tenths %
Volts
— kVA kW kVAR
Hundredths of Hertz
Hundredths of Hertz
Thousandths
Thousandths
Thousandths
Thousandths
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Tenths %
Tenths %
Tenths %
Tenths %
Tenths %
Tenths %
—
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
—
055
054
010
010
010
020
055
054
051
011
011
011
Alarm
Type *
010
052
010
010
010
—
010
010
010
010
A
A
—
—
—
—
—
—
F
F
—
F
Scale
Group
—
D
—
—
—
—
A
—
—
—
D
D
D
D
D
E
D
D
D
D
—
D
D
C
D
A
B
A
A
020
020
020
020
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
010
020
020
—
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 6–3:
List of Default Alarms by Alarm Number (continued)
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
02
03
04
05
Alarm
Number
Alarm Description
Disturbance Monitoring (1/2 Cycle)
01 Voltage Swell A
Voltage Swell B
Voltage Swell C
Voltage Swell N–G
Voltage Swell A–B
Voltage Swell B–C
Voltage Swell C–A
Voltage Sag A–N
Voltage Sag B–N
Voltage Sag C–N
Voltage Sag A–B
Voltage Sag B–C
Voltage Sag C–A
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Digital
Current Swell A
Current Swell B
Current Swell C
Current Swell N
Current Sag A
Current Sag B
Current Sag C
01
02
03
04
End of incremental energy interval
End of power demand interval
End of 1-second update cycle
End of 100ms update cycle
05 Power up/Reset
06-40 Reserved for custom alarms
*
Alarm Types are described in Table 6–4 on page 93.
Abbreviated
Display Name
End Inc Enr Int
End Power Dmd Int
End 1s Cyc
End 100ms Cyc
Pwr Up/Reset
—
Sag Vbn
Sag Vcn
Sag Vab
Sag Vbc
Sag Vca
Swell Ia
Swell Ib
Swell Ic
Swell Van
Swell Vbn
Swell Vcn
Swell Vng
Swell Vab
Swell Vbc
Swell Vca
Sag Van
Swell In
Sag Ia
Sag Ib
Sag Ic
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
Test
Register
Units
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
—
3
8
9
10
1
2
5
6
11
8
9
10
3
4
1
2
6
7
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Volts
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Amperes
Scale
Group
Alarm
Type *
A
A
D
A
D
D
D
D
A
A
B
A
D
D
D
D
D
E
D
D
—
—
—
—
—
—
090
080
080
080
090
090
090
090
080
090
090
090
080
080
080
090
080
080
080
080
070
070
070
070
070
—
Table 6–4: Alarm Types
Type Description
Standard Speed
010 Over Value Alarm
011 Over Power Alarm
Operation
If the test register value exceeds the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register falls below the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in seconds.
If the absolute value in the test register exceeds the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register falls below the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in seconds.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
93
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 6–4: Alarm Types
Type Description
012
020
021
051
052
053
054
055
Over Reverse Power Alarm
Under Value Alarm
Under Power Alarm
Phase Reversal
Phase Loss, Voltage
Phase Loss, Current
Leading Power Factor
Lagging Power Factor
Operation
If the absolute value in the test register exceeds the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register falls below the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. This alarm will only hold true for reverse power conditions. Positive power values will not cause the alarm to occur.
Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in seconds.
If the test register value is below the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register rises above the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in seconds.
If the absolute value in the test register is below the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register rises above the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in seconds.
The phase reversal alarm will occur whenever the phase voltage waveform rotation differs from the default phase rotation. The ABC phase rotation is assumed to be normal. If a CBA phase rotation is normal, the user should reprogram the circuit monitor’s phase rotation ABC to CBA phase rotation. The pickup and dropout setpoints and delays for phase reversal do not apply.
The phase loss voltage alarm will occur when any one or two phase voltages (but not all) fall to the pickup value and remain at or below the pickup value long enough to satisfy the specified pickup delay. When all of the phases remain at or above the dropout value for the dropout delay period, or when all of the phases drop below the specified phase loss pickup value, the alarm will dropout.
Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in seconds.
The phase loss current alarm will occur when any one or two phase currents (but not all) fall to the pickup value and remain at or below the pickup value long enough to satisfy the specified pickup delay. When all of the phases remain at or above the dropout value for the dropout delay period, or when all of the phases drop below the specified phase loss pickup value, the alarm will dropout.
Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in seconds.
The leading power factor alarm will occur when the test register value becomes more leading than the pickup setpoint (such as closer to 0.010) and remains more leading long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period. When the value becomes equal to or less leading than the dropout setpoint, that is 1.000, and remains less leading for the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Both the pickup setpoint and the dropout setpoint must be positive values representing leading power factor. Enter setpoints as integer values representing power factor in thousandths. For example, to define a dropout setpoint of 0.5, enter 500. Delays are in seconds.
The lagging power factor alarm will occur when the test register value becomes more lagging than the pickup setpoint (such as closer to –0.010) and remains more lagging long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period. When the value becomes equal to or less lagging than the dropout setpoint, that is 1.000, and remains less lagging for the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Both the pickup setpoint and the dropout setpoint must be positive values representing lagging power factor. Enter setpoints as integer values representing power factor in thousandths. For example, to define a dropout setpoint of –0.5, enter 500. Delays are in seconds.
High Speed
010
011
012
Over Value Alarm
Over Power Alarm
Over Reverse Power Alarm
If the test register value exceeds the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register falls below the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
If the absolute value in the test register exceeds the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register falls below the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
If the absolute value in the test register exceeds the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register falls below the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. This alarm will only hold true for reverse power conditions. Positive power values will not cause the alarm to occur.
Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
94
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
Table 6–4: Alarm Types
Type Description
020
021
051
052
053
054
055
Under Value Alarm
Under Power Alarm
Phase Reversal
Phase Loss, Voltage
Phase Loss, Current
Leading Power Factor
Lagging Power Factor
Operation
If the test register value is below the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register rises above the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
If the absolute value in the test register is below the setpoint long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period, the alarm condition will be true. When the value in the test register rises above the dropout setpoint long enough to satisfy the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
The phase reversal alarm will occur when ever the phase voltage waveform rotation differs from the default phase rotation. The ABC phase rotation is assumed to be normal. If a CBA normal phase rotation is normal, the user should reprogram the circuit monitor’s phase rotation ABC to CBA phase rotation. The pickup and dropout setpoints and delays for phase reversal do no apply.
The phase loss voltage alarm will occur when any one or two phase voltages (but not all) fall to the pickup value and remain at or below the pickup value long enough to satisfy the specified pickup delay. When all of the phases remain at or above the dropout value for the dropout delay period, or when all of the phases drop below the specified phase loss pickup value, the alarm will dropout.
Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
The phase loss current alarm will occur when any one or two phase currents (but not all) fall to the pickup value and remain at or below the pickup value long enough to satisfy the specified pickup delay. When all of the phases remain at or above the dropout value for the dropout delay period, or when all of the phases drop below the specified phase loss pickup value, the alarm will dropout.
Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive, delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
The leading power factor alarm will occur when the test register value becomes more leading than the pickup setpoint (closer to 0.010) and remains more leading long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period. When the value becomes equal to or less leading than the dropout setpoint, that is
1.000, and remains less leading for the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout.Both the pickup setpoint and the dropout setpoint must be positive values representing leading power factor. Enter setpoints as integer values representing power factor in thousandths. For example, to define a dropout setpoint of 0.5, enter 500. Delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
The lagging power factor alarm will occur when the test register value becomes more lagging than the pickup setpoint (closer to –0.010) and remains more lagging long enough to satisfy the pickup delay period. When the value becomes equal to or less lagging than the dropout setpoint, that is.
1.000 and remains less lagging for the dropout delay period, the alarm will dropout. Both the pickup setpoint and the dropout setpoint must be positive values representing lagging power factor. Enter setpoints as integer values representing power factor in thousandths. For example, to define a dropout setpoint of –0.5, enter 500. Delays are in hundreds of milliseconds.
Disturbance
080
090
Voltage/Current Swell
Voltage/Current Sag
The voltage and current swell alarms will occur whenever the continuous rms calculation is above the pickup setpoint and remains above the pickup setpoint for the specified number of cycles. When the continuous rms calculations fall below the dropout setpoint and remain below the setpoint for the specified number of cycles, the alarm will dropout. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive and delays are in cycles.
The voltage and current sag alarms will occur whenever the continuous rms calculation is below the pickup setpoint and remains below the pickup setpoint for the specified number of cycles. When the continuous rms calculations rise above the dropout setpoint and remain above the setpoint for the specified number of cycles, the alarm will drop out. Pickup and dropout setpoints are positive and delays are in cycles.
Digital
060
061
070
Digital Input On
Digital Input Off
Unary
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
The digital input transition alarms will occur whenever the digital input changes from off to on. The alarm will dropout when the digital input changes back to off from on. The pickup and dropout setpoints and delays do not apply.
The digital input transition alarms will occur whenever the digital input changes from on to off.The alarm will dropout when the digital input changes back to on from off. The pickup and dropout setpoints and delays do not apply.
This is a internal signal from the circuit monitor and can be used, for example, to alarm at the end of an interval or when the circuit monitor is reset. The pickup and dropout delays do not apply.
95
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
Table 6–4: Alarm Types
Type
Boolean
Description
Logic AND
100
Logic NAND
101
Logic OR
102
Logic NOR
103
Logic XOR
104
Operation
The NAND alarm will occur when any of the combined enabled alarms is false.
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The AND alarm will occur when all of the combined enabled alarms are true (up to 4).
The OR alarm will occur when any of the combined enabled alarms are true (up to 4).
The NOR alarm will occur when none of the combined enabled alarms are true (up to 4).
The XOR alarm will occur when only one of the combined enabled alarms is different than the other three.
96
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
WAVESHAPE ALARM
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
The waveshape alarm in the circuit monitor alerts you to abnormalities in the power system by comparing the present waveform to preceding waveforms.
This point-by-point comparison identifies waveshape changes too small to be detected by a disturbance alarm.
Use the circuit monitor display or SMS software to configure waveshape alarms to catch these subtle changes. Firmware version 12.430 and higher in the circuit monitor, and SMS version 3.32 and higher is required.
Waveshape alarms can be set up for these four measurements in any combination:
•
Phase voltage
•
Neutral to ground voltage
•
Phase current
•
Neutral current
In addition, the waveshape alarms can trigger any of the following:
•
Data logs
•
Disturbance waveform captures
•
100 ms rms event log
•
Adaptive waveform captures
During the waveshape calculations, the magnitude of the change in waveshapes is recorded as a value. Although this value has no units associated with it, a higher value indicates a greater change in the waveshape from those that occurred previously.
Consider the four waveshapes in Figure 6–4. Waveshape A shows only a
small abnormality with a value of 5, but waveshape D shows a much larger change from the normal waveshape and has a value of 57. Knowing this value for your system will help you determine the setpoints for the alarm. In this example, you may choose only to monitor the most severe cases and ignore the smaller anomalies.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
97
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
Figure 6–4: Example Threshold Settings
A. Waveshape alarm value of 5
B. Waveshape alarm value of 11
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
C. Waveshape alarm value of 27
D. Waveshape alarm value of 57
Threshold
Upper Limit
98
The threshold is the value that triggers the waveshape alarm when that value is exceeded. The threshold value can range from 1–100. No units are associated with this value. The factory default value of the threshold setting is 100 (it will not detect an alarm).
If we continue using Figure 6–4 as an example and choose to alarm only on
the severe cases as shown in waveshapes C and D, then the threshold value would be set to around 25.
The upper limit defines the highest waveshape value that will trigger a waveshape alarm. When the upper limit is reached, values beyond that will not trigger the waveshape alarm. Values above the upper limit are expected to be detected by other alarms set up by the user.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Using Waveshape Alarms
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
You can set the upper limit to any whole integer in the range from 1–100. No units are associated with this value. The factory default value of the upper limit is 100.
In summary, values that fall between the threshold and upper limit will trigger a waveshape alarm. Since we set the threshold to 25 in this example, then the upper limit would be set to around 60. These setpoints would trigger alarms for waveshapes C and D, but not for waveshapes A and B.
To use the waveshape alarm feature, you need to determine the threshold and upper limit for your system.
NOTE: For setup of waveshape alarms in SMS refer to the online SMS help file.
For setup from the display, follow these steps:
1. Set up a waveshape alarm using the default setting of 100.
Select Setup > Alarm > Create Custom > Waveshape.
2. Enable the alarm.
Select Setup > Alarm > Edit parameters> Waveshape>(select alarm
name)>Enable
3. Select Setup > Alarm > Edit Parameters > Waveshape.
4. While your power system is experiencing normal load conditions, view registers 2810–2813 for the highest waveshape values (collected every second). Also, view registers 2820–2823 for the maximum waveshape values since the last meter reset. You can use these values to help you select a suitable threshold and upper limit.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
99
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 6—Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
100
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CHAPTER 7—LOGGING
ABOUT LOGS
ALARM LOG
Alarm Log Storage
DATA LOGS
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 7—Logging
Logs are files stored in the non-volatile memory of the circuit monitor and are referred to as “onboard logs.” Circuit monitor logs include the following:
•
Alarm log
•
User-defined data logs
•
Min/Max log and Interval Min/Max/Average log
•
Maintenance log
Use SMS to set up and view all the logs. See the SMS online help for information about working with the circuit monitor’s onboard logs.
Waveform captures and the 100-ms rms event recording are not logs, but
the information is also saved in the circuit monitor’s memory. See “Memory
Allocation” on page 105 for information about shared memory in the circuit
monitor. For information about default circuit monitor settings, see “Factory
Defaults” in the installation manual.
Using
SMS
, you can set up the circuit monitor to log the occurrence of any alarm condition. Each time an alarm occurs it is entered into the alarm log.
The alarm log in the circuit monitor stores the pickup and dropout points of alarms along with the date and time associated with these alarms. You select whether the alarm log saves data as first-in-first-out (
FIFO
) or fill and hold. You can also view and save the alarm log to disk, and reset the alarm log to clear the data out of the circuit monitor’s memory.
NOTE: All data capture methods that are available in the CM4000 and
CM4250 are also available in the CM4000T. Also, a transient alarm has a pickup entry with a duration, but it does not have a dropout entry. For
information about logging with the CM4000T, refer to “Impulsive Transient
The circuit monitor stores alarm log data in nonvolatile memory. You define the size of the alarm log (the maximum number of events). When determining the maximum number of events, consider the circuit monitor’s
total storage capacity. See “Memory Allocation” on page 105 for additional
memory considerations.
The circuit monitor records meter readings at regularly scheduled intervals and stores the data in up to 14 independent data log files in its memory.
Some data log files are preconfigured at the factory. You can accept the preconfigured data logs or change them to meet your specific needs. You can set up each data log to store the following information:
•
Timed Interval—1 second to 24 hours (how often the values are logged)
•
First-In-First-Out (FIFO) or Fill and Hold
•
Values to be logged—up to 96 registers along with the date and time of each log entry
Use
SMS to clear each data log file, independently of the others, from the circuit monitor’s memory. For instructions on setting up and clearing data log files, refer to the
SMS online help file.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
101
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 7—Logging
Alarm-Driven Data Log Entries
Organizing Data Log Files
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The circuit monitor can detect over 100 alarm conditions, including over/under conditions, digital input changes, phase unbalance conditions,
and more. (See Alarms on page 83 for more information.) Use
SMS
to assign each alarm condition one or more tasks, including forcing data log entries into one or more data log files.
For example, assume that you’ve defined 14 data log files. Using
SMS
, you could select an alarm condition such as “Overcurrent Phase A” and set up the circuit monitor to force data log entries into any of the 14 log files each time the alarm condition occurs.
You can organize data log files in many ways. One possible way is to organize log files according to the logging interval. You might also define a log file for entries forced by alarm conditions. For example, you could set up four data log files as follows:
Data Log 5:
Data Log 6:
Data Log 7:
Data Log 8:
Log voltage every minute. Make the file large enough to hold 60 entries so that you could look back over the last hour’s voltage readings.
Log voltage, current, and power hourly for a historical record over a longer period.
Log energy once every day. Make the file large enough to hold 31 entries so that you could look back over the last month and see daily energy use.
Report by exception. The report by exception file contains data log entries that are forced by the occurrence of an alarm
condition. See the previous section “Alarm-Driven Data Log
Entries” for more information.
Data Log Storage
NOTE: The same data log file can support both scheduled and alarm-driven entries.
Each defined data log file entry stores a date and time and requires some additional overhead. To minimize storage space occupied by dates, times, and file overhead, use a few log files that log many values, as opposed to many log files that store only a few values each.
Consider that storage space is also affected by how many data log files you use (up to 14) and how many registers are logged in each entry (up to 96)
for each data log file. See “Memory Allocation” on page 105 for additional
storage considerations.
102
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
MIN/MAX LOGS
Min/Max Log
Interval Min/Max/Average Log
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 7—Logging
There are two Min/Max logs:
•
Min/Max log
•
Interval Min/Max/Average log
When any real-time reading reaches its highest or lowest value, the circuit monitor saves the value in the Min/Max log.You can use
SMS to view and reset this log. For instructions, refer to the SMS online help. You can also view the min/max values from the display. From the Main Menu, select
Min/Max and then select the value you’d like to view, such as amperes,
volts, or frequency. See “Viewing Minimum and Maximum Values from the
Min/Max Menu” on page 43 in this manual for detailed instructions. The
Min/Max log cannot be customized.
In addition to the Min/Max log, the circuit monitor has a Min/Max/Average log. The Min/Max/Average log stores 23 quantities, which are listed below.
At each interval, the circuit monitor records a minimum, a maximum, and an average value for each quantity. It also records the date and time for each interval along with the date and time for each minimum and maximum value within the interval. For example, every hour the default log will log the minimum voltage for phase A over the last hour, the maximum voltage for phase A over the last hour, and the average voltage for phase A over the last hour. All 23 values are preconfigured with a default interval of 60 minutes, but you can reset the interval from 1 to 1440 minutes. To setup, view, and reset the Min/Max/Average log using
SMS
, see ”Reading and
Writing Registers” in the SMS online help. The following values are logged into the Min/Max/Average log:
•
Voltage Phase A–B
•
Voltage Phase B–C
•
Voltage Phase C–A
•
Voltage N–G
•
Current Phase A
•
Current Phase B
•
Current Phase C
•
Current Phase N
•
Current Phase G
• kW 3-Phase Average
• kVAR 3-Phase Average
• kVA 3-Phase Average
• kW Demand 3-Phase Average
• kVAR Demand 3-Phase Average
• kVA Demand 3-Phase Average
•
THD Voltage A–N
•
THD Voltage B–N
•
THD Voltage C–N
•
THD Voltage A–B
•
THD Voltage B–C
•
THD Voltage C–A
•
True Power Factor 3-Phase Total
•
Displacement Power Factor 3-Phase Total
103
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 7—Logging
Interval Min/Max/Average Log Storage
MAINTENANCE LOG
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
When determining storage space among the logs, consider that storage space is affected by how often the circuit monitor is logging min/max/average values and how many entries are stored.
The circuit monitor stores a maintenance log in nonvolatile memory. Table
7–1 describes the values stored in the maintenance log. These values are
cumulative over the life of the circuit monitor and cannot be reset.
Use
SMS to view the maintenance log. Refer to the
SMS
online help for instructions.
Table 7–1: Values Stored in Maintenance Log
Value Stored
Number of Demand Resets
Number of Energy Resets
Number of Min/Max Resets
Number of Output Operations
Number of Power Losses
Number of Firmware Downloads
Number of I/R Comms Sessions
Highest Temperature Monitored
Lowest Temperature Monitored
Number of GPS time syncs
Number of option card changes
Number of I/O extender changes
Number of times KYZ pulse output overdriven
Number of input metering accumulation resets
Description
Number of times demand values have been reset.
Number of times energy values have been reset.
Number of times min/max values have been reset.
Number of times a digital output has operated. This value is stored for each digital output.
Number of times circuit monitor has lost control power.
Number of times new firmware has been downloaded to the circuit monitor over communications.
Number of times the I/R communications port has been used. (Available only with VFD display.)
Highest temperature reached inside the circuit monitor.
Lowest temperature reached inside the circuit monitor.
Number of syncs received from the global positioning satellite transmitter.
Number of times the option card has been changed. Stored for both option card slots.
Number of times the I/O extender has been changed.
Number of times the KYZ pulse output is overdriven
Number of times input pulse demand metering has been reset.
104
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
MEMORY ALLOCATION
Figure 7–1: Memory allocation example
Available Space
Data Log 4
Data Log 3
Data Log 2
Data Log 1
Alarm Log
100 ms Event Recordings
Adaptive Waveform (seconds)
If you want to add a new log file, but the file is too large for the available space, you must either:
• reduce the size of Data Log 4 or
• reduce the size of one or more
of the existing files
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 7—Logging
The circuit monitor’s standard, nonvolatile memory is 16 MB and can be
upgraded to 32 MB and higher. See “Upgrading Memory in the Circuit
Monitor” on page 136 for more information about upgrading memory.
When using
SMS
to set up a circuit monitor, you must allocate the total data storage capacity between the following logs and recorded information:
•
Alarm log
•
Steady-state waveform capture
•
Disturbance waveform capture (cycles)
•
Adaptive waveform capture (seconds)
•
100-ms rms event recording
•
Up to 14 data logs
•
Min/Max/Average log
In addition, the choices you make for the items listed below directly affect the amount of memory used:
•
The number of data log files (1 to 14)
•
The registers logged in each entry (1 to 96), for each data log file.
•
The maximum number of entries in each data log file.
•
The maximum number of events in the alarm log file.
•
The maximum number of waveform captures in each of the waveform capture files. Consider that you set the maximum number for three different waveform captures: steady-state, disturbance waveform
(cycles), and adaptive waveforms (seconds) plus a 100 ms rms event recording.
The number you enter for each of the above items depends on the amount of the memory that is still available, and the available memory depends on the numbers you’ve already assigned to the other items.
With a minimum of 16 MB of memory, it is unlikely that you will need to use all the circuit monitor’s memory, even if you use all 14 data logs and the other recording features. However, it is important to understand that memory is shared by the alarm logs, data logs, and waveform captures.
Figure 7–1, on the left, shows how the memory might be allocated.
In Figure 7–1, the user has set up an adaptive waveform (seconds), a 100
ms event recording, an alarm log, and three data logs (two small logs, and one larger log). Of the total available nonvolatile memory, about 25% is still available. If the user decided to add a fourth data log file, the file could be no larger than the space still available—25% of the circuit monitor’s total storage capacity. If the fourth file had to be larger than the space still available, the user would have to reduce the size of one of the other files to free up the needed space.
SMS displays the memory allocation statistics in the OnBoard Files dialog
box shown in Figure 7–2. Color blocks on the bar show the space devoted
to each type of log file, while black indicates memory still available. For instructions on setting up log files using SMS , refer to SMS online help file included with the software.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
105
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 7—Logging
Figure 7–2: Memory allocation in SMS
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Memory
Allocation
106
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 8—Waveform and Event Capture
CHAPTER 8—WAVEFORM AND EVENT CAPTURE
TYPES OF WAVEFORM CAPTURES
Steady-State Waveform Capture
Initiating a Steady-state Waveform
Disturbance Waveform Capture
Using waveform captures you can monitor power sags and swells that may be produced, for example, when an X-ray machine and an elevator are used at the same time, or more commonly, when lightning strikes the distribution system that feeds the facility. The system’s alarms can be programmed to detect and record such fluctuations, enabling you to determine an appropriate strategy for corrective action.
Circuit monitors use a sophisticated, high-speed sampling technique to simultaneously sample up to 512 samples per cycle on all current and voltage channels. From this sampling, the circuit monitor saves waveform data into its memory. These waveform captures can be graphically displayed using
SMS
. The circuit monitor has one type of waveform capture that you initiate manually; the other three event captures are associated with and triggered by an event such as a digital input transition or over/under condition. These event recordings help you understand what happened during an electrical event. Using event captures you can analyze power disturbances in detail, identify potential problems, and take corrective
action. See Disturbance Monitoring on page 113 for more about
disturbance monitoring. The types of event captures are described in the sections that follow.
The steady-state waveform capture can be initiated manually to analyze steady-state harmonics. This waveform provides information about individual harmonics, which
SMS
calculates through the 255th harmonic. It also calculates total harmonic distortion (THD) and other power quality parameters. The waveform capture records one cycle at 512 samples per cycle simultaneously on all metered channels.
Using
SMS
from a remote
PC
, initiate a steady-state waveform capture manually by selecting the circuit monitor and issuing the acquire command.
SMS will automatically retrieve the waveform capture from the circuit monitor. You can display the waveform for all three phases, or zoom in on a single waveform, which includes a data block with extensive harmonic data.
See the
SMS
online help for instructions.
Use the disturbance waveform capture to record events that may occur within a short time span such as multiple sags or swells. The circuit monitor initiates a disturbance waveform capture automatically when an alarm condition occurs (if the alarm is set up to perform the waveform capture).
The trigger may be from an external device such as an protective relay trip contact connected to a digital input or voltage sag alarm, or you can also initiate the waveform capture manually from SMS at any time.
In SMS , for the disturbance waveform capture, you select the sample rate and how many cycles and pre-event cycles the circuit monitor will capture
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
107
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 8—Waveform and Event Capture
Adaptive Waveform Capture
100MS RMS EVENT RECORDING
108
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 8–1: Available Resolutions for Disturbance Waveform
Captures
Samples per Cycle (Resolution)
16
32
64
128
256
512
Max Duration
715 cycles
357 cycles
178 cycles
89 cycles
44 cycles
22 cycles
See the SMS online help for instructions on setting up disturbance waveform captures.
The adaptive waveform capture is used to record longer events that cannot be recorded with the disturbance waveform capture. For example, using the adaptive waveform capture you could get a detailed view of an entire recloser sequence. Each time a sag or swell is detected, the circuit monitor triggers the waveform capture. The circuit monitor initiates an adaptive waveform capture automatically when an alarm condition occurs, or the waveform capture can also be triggered by an external device such as a protective relay. The unique feature of the adaptive waveform capture is that it can be enabled to stop recording at the dropout of the alarm, which allows you to capture data while the alarm is true. You can also initiate this waveform capture at any time.
In
SMS
, for the adaptive waveform capture, you select the sample rate, and how many seconds of the event the circuit monitor will capture (see
Table 8–2). You can also select how many channels to record. Selecting
fewer channels lets you record more seconds.
Table 8–2: Available Resolutions for Adaptive Waveform Captures
64
128
256
512
Samples per Cycle
(Resolution)
16
32
Max. Duration
(with per-phase current and voltage channels)
88 seconds
44 seconds
22 seconds
11 seconds
5 seconds
2 seconds
Choose fewer samples per cycle when you want to see more total seconds; choose fewer channels to see a longer duration. See the SMS online help for instructions on setting up adaptive waveform captures.
NOTE: The circuit monitor also records the status of up to 16 digital inputs that can be displayed along with the waveform capture. This is configured by default.
The 100ms rms event capture gives you a different view of an event by
recording 100ms data for the amount of time you specify. Table 8–3 lists all
the quantities captured. This type of event capture is useful for analyzing what happened during a motor start or recloser operation because it shows a long event without using a significant amount of memory. The circuit
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 8—Waveform and Event Capture
monitor initiates the event capture automatically when an alarm condition occurs, or an external device can also trigger the event capture. You select the duration of the event recording (up to 300 seconds) and the number of pre-event seconds (1–10) that the circuit monitor will capture.
Table 8–3: 100ms rms Event Capture Quantities
Current
Per-Phase
Neutral
1
Voltage
Line-to-Neutral, Per-Phase*
Line-to-Line, Per-Phase
Real Power
Per-Phase
*
3-Phase Total
Reactive Power
Per-Phase
*
3-Phase Total
Apparent Power
3-Phase Total
Power Factor (True)
3-Phase Total
*4-wire systems only
CYCLE-BY-CYCLE RMS EVENT
RECORDING
Setting Up Cycle-by-Cycle RMS Event
Recording
The circuit monitor can initiate a Cycle-by-Cycle log capture automatically when an alarm condition occurs. An external device can also trigger the capture. This log will terminate after a period of time that you designate, or upon alarm dropout (early terminate), whichever comes first. You can set the duration of the event recording (up to 3000 entries - 50 seconds for a 60
Hz system). The number of pre-event records can be from 0–100. The quantities logged in the Cycle-by-Cycle log are not user configurable. They are the rms values of eight channels (V ab
, V bc
, V ca
, V ng
, I a
, I b
, I c
, and I n
). A date-time stamp is also appended to each entry.
To set up Cycle-by-Cycle RMS Event Recording, refer to Appendix B for instructions on using command codes and follow these steps:
1. Write 9020 in register 8000.
2. Enter the parameters in the registers as shown in Table 8–4 on page
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
109
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 8—Waveform and Event Capture
Configuring the Alarms
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 8–4: Parameter Settings for Cycle-by-Cycle RMS Event
8019
8022
8023
8024
8025
Register
8001
8002
8003
8017
8018
Register Name Parameter Description
Command parameters
Status pointer
Result pointer
Data pointer
30
8
3000
8020
8021
8022
(-1)
0
30
300
File number
Allocated records size (not user configurable)
Allocated file size per number of records
Register number where status will be placed
Register number where result will be placed
Register number where data will be placed
Enable file
FIFO
Pre-history
Maximum per trigger
3. Write 7110 in register 8000.
4. Write 1 in register 8001.
5. Write 9021 in register 8000.
To trigger the Cycle-by-Cycle log, you must also configure the alarms that trigger Cycle-by-Cycle RMS Event Recording. To do so, follow these steps:
1. Write 9020 in register 8000.
2. Determine the Alarm Position Number (1–185).
3. Calculate register numbers for the Datalog Specifier.
4. 10296 + (20 x Alarm Position Number).
5. Read the Datalog Specifier register value and add 8192 to this value.
6. Write the new Datalog Specifier value to the Datalog Specifier register.
7. Repeat steps 2–5 for other alarms that are to trigger the Cycle-by-Cycle log.
8. Write 1 in register 8001.
9. Write 9021 in register 8000.
110
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
SETTING UP THE CIRCUIT MONITOR
FOR AUTOMATIC EVENT CAPTURE
Setting Up Alarm-Triggered Event
Capture
Setting Up Input-Triggered Event
Capture
WAVEFORM STORAGE
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 8—Waveform and Event Capture
There are two ways to set up the circuit monitor for automatic event capture:
•
Use an alarm to trigger the waveform capture.
•
Use an external trigger such as a relay.
This section provides an overview of the steps you perform in SMS to setup these event captures.
To set up the circuit monitor for automatic event capture, use
SMS
to perform the following steps:
NOTE: For detailed instructions, refer to the SMS online help.
1. Select the type of event capture (disturbance, adaptive, or 100ms) and set up the number of samples per cycle, pre-event cycles or seconds, and duration.
2. Select an alarm condition.
3. Define the pick up and dropout setpoints of the alarm, if applicable.
4. Select the automatic waveform capture option (Capture Waveform on
Event). Check the pickup-to-dropout box if you want it to use it for an adaptive waveform capture.
5. Repeat these steps for the desired alarm conditions.
When the circuit monitor is connected to an external device such as a protective relay, the circuit monitor can capture and provide valuable information on short duration events such as voltage sags. The circuit monitor must be equipped with digital inputs on an
IOX
Extender, or an
IOC-44 Digital I/O Card.
To set up the circuit monitor for event capture triggered by an input, use
SMS to perform the following steps:
NOTE: For detailed instructions, refer to the SMS online help.
1. Select the type of event capture (disturbance, adaptive, or 100ms) and set up the number of samples per cycle, pre-event cycles or seconds, and duration.
2. Create a digital alarm for the input if it is not already defined.
3. Select the alarm.
4. Choose the type of event recording you would like.
The circuit monitor can store multiple captured waveforms in its nonvolatile memory. The number of waveforms that can be stored is based on the amount of memory that has been allocated to waveform capture. However, the maximum number of stored waveforms is eighty of each type. All stored waveform data is retained on power-loss.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
111
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 8—Waveform and Event Capture
HOW THE CIRCUIT MONITOR
CAPTURES AN EVENT
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
When the circuit monitor senses the trigger—that is, when the digital input transitions from OFF to ON , or an alarm condition is met—the circuit monitor transfers the cycle data from its data buffer into the memory allocated for event captures. The number of cycles or seconds it saves depends on the number of cycles or seconds you selected.
Figure 8–1 shows an event capture. In this example, the circuit monitor was
monitoring a constant load when a utility fault occurred, followed by a return to normal.
Figure 8–1: Event capture initiated from a high-speed input
112
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
CHAPTER 9—DISTURBANCE MONITORING
ABOUT DISTURBANCE MONITORING
Momentary voltage disturbances are an increasing concern for industrial plants, hospitals, data centers, and other commercial facilities because modern equipment used in those facilities tends to be more sensitive to voltage sags, swells, and momentary interruptions. The circuit monitor can detect these events by continuously monitoring and recording current and voltage information on all metered channels. Using this information, you can diagnose equipment problems resulting from voltage sags or swells and identify areas of vulnerability, enabling you to take corrective action.
The interruption of an industrial process because of an abnormal voltage condition can result in substantial costs, which manifest themselves in many ways:
• labor costs for cleanup and restart
• lost productivity
• damaged product or reduced product quality
• delivery delays and user dissatisfaction
The entire process can depend on the sensitivity of a single piece of equipment. Relays, contactors, adjustable speed drives, programmable controllers, PCs, and data communication networks are all susceptible to transient and short-duration power problems. After the electrical system is interrupted or shut down, determining the cause may be difficult.
Several types of voltage disturbances are possible, each potentially having a different origin and requiring a separate solution. A momentary interruption occurs when a protective device interrupts the circuit that feeds a facility. Swells and overvoltages can damage equipment or cause motors to overheat. Perhaps the biggest power quality problem is the momentary voltage sag caused by faults on remote circuits.
A voltage sag is a brief (1/4 cycle to 1 minute) decrease in rms voltage magnitude. A sag is typically caused by a remote fault somewhere on the
power system, often initiated by a lightning strike. In Figure 9–1, the utility
circuit breaker cleared the fault near plant D. The fault not only caused an interruption to plant D, but also resulted in voltage sags to plants A, B, and C.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
113
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
NOTE: The CM4250 is able to detect sag and swell events less than 1/4 cycle duration. However, it may be impractical to have setpoints more sensitive than 10% for voltage and current fluctuations.
Figure 9–1: A fault can cause voltage sag on the whole system.
Utility
Circuit Breakers with Reclosers
1 Plant A
Utility
Transformer
2 Plant B
3 Plant C
X
4 Plant D
Fault
A fault near plant D, cleared by the utility circuit breaker, can still affect plants A, B, and C, resulting in a voltage sag.
System voltage sags are much more numerous than interruptions, since a wider part of the distribution system is affected. And, if reclosers are operating, they may cause repeated sags. The circuit monitor can record
recloser sequences, too. The waveform in Figure 9–2 shows the magnitude
of a voltage sag, which persists until the remote fault is cleared.
Figure 9–2: Waveform showing voltage sag, which was caused by a remote fault and lasted five cycles.
114
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CAPABILITIES OF THE CIRCUIT
MONITOR DURING AN EVENT
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
With the information obtained from the circuit monitor during a disturbance, you can solve disturbance-related problems, including the following:
•
Obtain accurate measurement from your power system
— Identify the number of sags, swells, or interruptions for evaluation
— Determine the source (user or utility) of sags or swells
— Accurately distinguish between sags and interruptions, with accurate recording of the time and date of the occurrence
— Provide accurate data in equipment specification (ride-through, etc.)
•
Determine equipment sensitivity
— Compare equipment sensitivity of different brands (contactor dropout, drive sensitivity, etc.)
— Diagnose mysterious events such as equipment failure, contactor dropout, computer glitches, etc.
— Compare actual sensitivity of equipment to published standards
— Use waveform capture to determine exact disturbance characteristics to compare with equipment sensitivity
— Justify purchase of power conditioning equipment
— Distinguish between equipment failures and power system related problems
•
Develop disturbance prevention methods
— Develop solutions to voltage sensitivity-based problems using actual data
•
Work with the utility
— Discuss protection practices with the serving utility and negotiate suitable changes to shorten the duration of potential sags (reduce interruption time delays on protective devices)
— Work with the utility to provide alternate “stiffer” services (alternate design practices)
The circuit monitor calculates rms magnitudes, based on 128 data points per cycle, every 1/2 cycle. This ensures that even sub-cycle duration rms variations are not missed.The circuit monitor is capable of measuring electromagnetic phenomena in a power system as defined in IEEE
Recommended Practice for Monitoring Electric Power Quality (IEEE
Standard 1159-95) for the following categories:
•
Short duration variations—instantaneous, momentary, and temporary
•
Long duration variations
•
Voltage imbalance
•
Waveform distortion
•
Power frequency variations
•
Voltage transients (30.72 kHz)
When the circuit monitor detects a sag or swell, it can perform the following actions:
•
Perform a waveform capture with a resolution up to 512 samples per cycle on all channels of the metered current and voltage inputs. Three types of automatic event captures are possible: disturbance, adaptive,
115
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
USING THE CIRCUIT MONITOR WITH
SMS TO PERFORM DISTURBANCE
MONITORING
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
captures. Use
SMS
to setup the event capture and retrieve the waveform.
•
Record the event in the alarm log. When an event occurs, the circuit monitor updates the alarm log with an event date and time stamp with
1 millisecond resolution for a sag or swell pickup, and an rms magnitude corresponding to the most extreme value of the sag or swell during the event pickup delay. Also, the circuit monitor can record the sag or swell dropout in the alarm log at the end of the disturbance. Information stored includes: a dropout time stamp with 1 millisecond resolution and a second rms magnitude corresponding to the most extreme value of the sag or swell. Use
SMS
to view the alarm log.
•
Force a data log entry in up to 14 independent data logs. Use
SMS
to set up and view the data logs.
•
Operate any output relays when the event is detected.
•
Indicate the alarm on the display by flashing the alarm LED to show that a sag or swell event has occurred. From the circuit monitor’s display, a list of up to 10 of the previous alarms in the high priority log is available. You can also view the alarms in
SMS
.
The following procedure provides an overview of the steps to set up the circuit monitor for disturbance monitoring. For detailed instructions, see the
SMS
online help. In
SMS
under Setup > Devices Routing, the Device Setup dialog box contains the tabs for setting up disturbance monitoring. After you have performed basic set up of the circuit monitor, perform three setup steps:
1. Define the storage space for the alarm log, waveform capture, and any forced data logs using the Onboard Files tab in
SMS
. This sets up the amount of circuit monitor memory that the logs and waveform capture will use.
Select a data log
Figure 9–3: Onboard Files tab
Select how the log will save data
Define the size of the waveform or event capture
116
2. Associate an alarm with data logs and waveform/event captures using the Onboard Alarms/Events tab.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
Figure 9–4: Onboard Alarms/Events tab
Define the alarm
Select data logs and/or waveform captures be associated with the alarm
UNDERSTANDING THE ALARM LOG
Enable the alarm
3. In addition, you can set up a relay to operate upon an event using the
I/O tab in
SMS
.
NOTE: For the I/O Extender, you must define the relay from the display before SMS
can recognize it. See “Setting Up I/Os” on page 25 of this
bulletin for instructions.
Pickups and dropouts of an event are logged into the onboard alarm log of
the circuit monitor as separate entries. Figure 9–5 on page 118 illustrates
an alarm log entry sequence. In this example, two events are entered into the alarm log:
•
Alarm Log Entry 1—The value stored in the alarm log at the end of the pickup delay is the furthest excursion from normal during the pickup delay period t1. This is calculated using 128 data point rms calculations.
•
Alarm Log Entry 2—The value stored in the alarm log at the end of the dropout delay is the furthest excursion from normal during period t2 from the end of the pickup delay to the end of the dropout delay.
The time stamps for the pickup and dropout reflect the actual duration of these periods.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
117
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
Figure 9–5: Event log entries example
t1 t2
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Dropout
Threshold
Pickup
Threshold
Event Log
Entry Value 1
Pickup
Delay
Event Log
Entry 2 Value
Dropout
Delay
Once the alarm has been recorded, you can view the alarm log in SMS. A
sample alarm log entry is shown in Figure 9–6. See
SMS
online help for instructions on working with the alarm log.
Figure 9–6: Sample alarm log entry
118
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
USING EN50160 EVALUATION
Overview
How Results of the Evaluations Are
Reported
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
This section describes how the circuit monitor operates when the European standard EN50160 evaluation feature is enabled. For instructions on how to
enable this evaluation, see “Setting Up EN50160 Evaluation” on page 130.
This overview summarizes the EN50160 standard.
EN50160:2000 “Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public distribution systems” is a European standard that defines the quality of the voltage a customer can expect from the electric utility. Although this is a
European standard, it can be applied in the U.S.
The circuit monitor evaluates the following electrical characteristics in accordance with EN50160:
•
Frequency
•
Magnitude of the supply voltage
•
Supply voltage variations
•
Rapid voltage changes – voltage magnitude and flicker
•
Supply voltage dips
•
Short interruptions of the supply voltage
•
Long interruptions of the supply voltage
•
Temporary power frequency overvoltages
•
Transient overvoltages
•
Supply voltage unbalance
•
Harmonic voltage
The EN50160 evaluations can be divided into two categories—those based on metering data during normal operation and those based on abnormal events. Much of this data is available from the circuit monitor standard data and alarms; however, evaluation of flicker and transient overvoltages requires a CM4000T.
The standard sets limits for some of the evaluations. These limits are built into the circuit monitor firmware. You can configure registers for other evaluations and change them from the default values. These configuration registers are protected while revenue security is active. (Revenue security is a circuit monitor feature that restricts access to certain configuration registers and reset commands related to revenue metering.)
The circuit monitor reports evaluation data in register entries and alarm log
entries. Table 9–1 describes the register entries for the evaluation data.
Table 9–1: Register Entries
Register Number Description
3910
3911
Portal registers
Summary bitmap of active evaluations that reports which areas of evaluation are active in the circuit monitor.
Summary bitmap of evaluation status that reports the pass/fail status of each area of evaluation.
Detail bitmap of evaluation status that reports the pass/fail status of the evaluation of each individual data item. Detailed data summary information is also available for each of the evaluations for the present interval and for the previous interval. You can access this data over a communications link using Modbus block reads of “portal” registers. Refer
to “EN50160 Evaluation of Meter Data” on page 124 for additional
information.
Log entries for the evaluation data include:
•
Onboard alarm log entry for diagnostic alarms. When the status of an area of evaluation is outside the range of acceptable values, an entry is
119
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
made in the on-board alarm log. This entry provides notification of the exception for a specific area of evaluation. This notification is reported only in SMS and does not appear on the local display.
•
Onboard alarm log entry for alarms. Circuit monitor alarms are used to perform some of the evaluations. If an onboard alarm log is enabled, an entry will be made in the on-board alarm log when any of these alarms pick up or drop out.
NOTE: Enabling EN50160 evaluation does not guarantee that the onboard alarm log is enabled or properly configured to record these events. Also, when you enable EN50160 evaluation, you do not automatically configure onboard data logging or waveform capture files. You should consider your requirements and configure these files and the event captures triggered by the various alarms to provide any additional data that would be helpful to diagnose or document an exception to this standard.
Possible Configurations Through
Register Writes
Evaluation of Abnormal Events
120
This section describes the changes you can make to configurations for the
EN50160 evaluation through register writes in the circuit monitor. Refer to
“System Configuration and Status Registers” on page 125 for register
assignments.
•
Select the first day of the week for evaluations. You can define the first day of the week to be used for the EN50160 evaluations in register
3905.
•
Define the voltage interruption. The standard defines an interruption as voltage less than 1% of nominal voltage. Because some locations require a different definition, you can configure this value in register
3906.
•
Define allowable range of slow voltage variations. The standard defines the allowable range of slow voltage variations to be ±10% of nominal voltage. Because some locations require a different definition, you can configure this value in register 3907.
Count of Rapid Voltage Changes
The standard does not specify the rate of change of the voltage for this evaluation. For this evaluation, the circuit monitor counts a change of
≥
5% nominal and
≤
10% nominal from one one-second meter cycle to the next one-second meter cycle. It counts rapid voltage decreases and increases separately. The interval for accumulation of these events is one week.
You can configure the number of allowable events per week in register
3917. (Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled.)
Detection and classification of Supply Voltage Dips
According to EN50160, voltage dips are generally caused by faults in installations or the electrical utility distribution system. Under normal operating conditions, the number of voltage dips expected may be anywhere from less than a hundred to nearly a thousand. The majority of voltage dips last less than one second with a depth less than 60%.
However, voltage dips of greater depth and duration can occasionally occur.
In some regions, voltage dips with depths between 10% and 15% of the nominal voltage are common because of the switching of loads at a customer’s installation.
Supply voltage dips are under-voltage events that last from 10 ms to 1 minute. Magnitudes are the minimum rms values during the event.
Disturbance alarms are used to detect events
≤
11 seconds. The registerbased disturbance event log is used to capture the events. Standard speed
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
undervoltage alarms are used to detect events having a duration greater than 11 seconds. The register-based event log is used to capture the events. The EN50160 function watches these logs for new entries and classifies these events. The standard does not specifically address how to classify supply voltage dips or how many are allowable. The circuit monitor detects and classifies the dips for each phase voltage as follows:
Depth (D) % Nominal
Duration (t) seconds
0.01
≤
t <
0.02
0.02
≤
t <
0.05
0.05
≤
t <
0.1
0.1
≤
t <
0.2
0.2
≤
t <
0.5
0.5
≤
t <
1
1
≤
t < 3 3
≤
t < 10
10
≤
D < 15
15
≤
D < 30
30
≤
D < 45
45
≤
D < 60
60
≤
D < 75
75
≤
D < 90
90
≤
D < 99
Total
10
≤ t <
20
20
≤
t <
60
60
≤ t <
180
Total
You can configure the number of allowable events per week for each range of Depth in registers 3920 – 3927. (Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled.)
Detection of Interruptions of the Supply voltage
The standard defines an interruption as voltage less than 1% of nominal voltage. Because some locations require a different definition, you can configure this value in register 3906. Interruptions are classified as “short” if duration
≤
3 minutes or “long” otherwise. The circuit monitor classifies interruptions as shown in the following table.
You can configure the number of allowable short interruptions per year in register 3918 (Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled). You can configure the number of allowable long interruptions per year in register
3919. (Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled.) t < 1 1
≤
t < 2 2
≤
t < 5 5
≤
t < 10
Duration (t) seconds
10
≤ t < 20 20
≤ t < 60 60
≤ t < 180 180
≤ t < 600 600
≤ t < 1200 1200
≤
t
Total
Detecting and Classifying Temporary Power Frequency Overvoltages
As stated in EN50160, a temporary power frequency overvoltage generally appears during a fault in the electrical utility power distribution system or in a customer’s installation, and disappears when the fault is cleared. Usually, the overvoltage may reach the value of phase-to-phase voltage because of a shift of the neutral point of the three-phase voltage system.
Under certain circumstances, a fault occurring upstream from a transformer will produce temporary overvoltages on the low voltage side for the time during which the fault current flows. Such overvoltages will generally not exceed 1.5 kV rms.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
121
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The circuit monitor detects and classifies the overvoltages for each phase voltage as follows:
Magnitude (M)
% Nominal
110 < M
≤
115
115 < M
≤
130
130 < M
≤
145
145 < M
≤
160
160 < M
≤
175
175 < M
≤
200
M > 200
Total
0.01
≤ t <
0.02
0.02
≤ t <
0.05
0.05
≤ t <
0.1
0.1 t <
0.2
Duration (t) seconds
0.2
≤ t <
0.5
0.5
≤ t
< 1
1
≤ t <
3
3
≤ t <
10
10
≤ t <
20
20
≤ t <
60
60
≤ t <
180
Total
You can configure the number of allowable events per week for each range of Magnitude in registers 3930 – 3937. (Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled.)
122
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Detecting Transient Overvoltages
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
The impulsive transient alarm is used to detect transient overvoltages between live conductors and earth. (This feature is available only in the
CM4000T model.) The register-based transient event log is used to capture the events. The log is configured to capture all transient events. The
EN50160 function watches this log for new entries and classifies the overvoltages for each phase voltage as follows:
Magnitude (M) % Nominal
200 < M
≤
300
300 < M
≤
400
400 < M
≤
500
500 < M
≤
600
600 < M
≤
700
700 < M
≤
800
800 < M
≤
900
900 < M
≤
1000
M > 1000
Total t < 20 20
≤
t < 50
Duration (t) microseconds
50
≤
t < 100 100
≤
t < 200 200
≤
t < 500 500
≤
t < 1000 1000
≤
t < 2000 Total
You can configure the number of allowable number of events per week for each range of Magnitude in registers 3940 – 3949. (Default = -32768 =
Pass/Fail evaluation disabled.)
Circuit Monitor Operation with EN50160
Enabled
Resetting Statistics
Standard Alarms Allocated for Evaluations
This section describes how circuit monitor operation is affected when
EN50160 evaluation is enabled.
You can reset statistics for the EN50160 evaluations with the command
11100. A parameter value of 9999 will reset all items. A timestamp is provided in registers for each item indicating when the last reset was performed. This command is disabled when revenue security is active.
NOTE: You should reset statistics when you enable EN50160 for the first time and also whenever you make any changes to the basic meter setup such as
changing the nominal voltage. See “Setting Up EN50160 Evaluation” on page 130.
To accomplish some of the evaluations required and to provide a record of events in the on-board alarm log, the circuit monitor uses standard alarms.
When the evaluation is enabled, certain alarm positions will be claimed for use in the evaluation. You cannot use these alarms for other purposes while the evaluation is enabled. These alarms include:
•
Over Voltage: Standard speed alarm positions 75-77
•
Under Voltage: Standard speed alarm positions 78-80
•
Disturbance (voltage sags and swells): Disturbance alarm positions 1-3 and 5-13
•
Transient Overvoltages: Impulsive transient alarm
“EN50160” is included in the alarm label for alarms being used by this evaluation.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
123
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
Flicker Monitoring
Harmonic Calculations
Time Intervals
EN50160 Evaluation of Meter Data
Power Frequency
Supply Voltage Variations
Flicker Severity
1
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
When EN50160 evaluation is enabled, you can configure flicker monitoring.
(This feature is available only in the CM4000T model.) The settings specified in the standard are:
•
Pst duration = 10 minutes
•
Plt duration 12 x Pst.
When EN50160 evaluation is enabled, the harmonic calculations will be set to update every 10 seconds. You can select the format of the harmonic calculations to be %Nominal, %Fundamental, or %RMS.
Time intervals are synchronized with the Trending and Forecasting feature.
Refer to the POWERLOGIC Web Pages instruction bulletin 63230-304-207.
Weekly values will be posted at midnight of the morning of the “First Day of
Week” configured in register 3905. Yearly values will be based on the calendar year.
All of the EN50160 data is stored in non volatile memory once per hour or when an event occurs. In the event of a meter reset, up to one hour of routine meter evaluation data will be lost.
When the EN50160 evaluation is enabled, the circuit monitor evaluates metered data under normal operating conditions, “excluding situations arising from faults or voltage interruptions.” For this evaluation, normal operating conditions are defined as all phase voltages greater than the definition of interruption. The standard specifies acceptable ranges of operation for these data items.
This section describes how the EN50160 standard addresses metered data.
EN50160 states that the nominal frequency of the supply voltage shall be 50
Hz. Under normal operating conditions the mean value of the fundamental frequency measured over ten seconds shall be within the following range:
• for systems with synchronous connection to an interconnected system:
— 50 Hz
±
1% during 99.5% of a year
— 50 Hz +4 to -6% for 100% of the time
• for systems with no synchronous connection to an interconnected system (for example, power systems on some islands):
— 50 Hz
±
2% during 95% of a week
— 50 Hz
±
15% for 100% of the time
NOTE: The same range of percentages are used for 60 Hz systems.
EN50160 states that under normal operating conditions, excluding situations arising from faults or voltage interruptions,
• during each period of one week 95% of the ten minute mean rms values of the supply voltage shall be within the range of U n
±
10%.
• all ten minute mean rms values of the supply voltage shall be within the range of U n
+10% to -15%.
EN50160 states that under normal operating conditions, in any period of one week, the long-term flicker severity caused by voltage fluctuation should be P n
≤
1 for 95% of the time. (This feature is available only in the CM4000T model.)
1
BS EN 50160:2000, Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public distribution systems, BSi.
124
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Supply Voltage Unbalance
Harmonic Voltage
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
EN50160 states that under normal operating conditions, during each period of one week, 95% of the ten minute mean rms values of the negative phase sequence component of the supply voltage shall be within the range 0–2% of the positive phase sequence component.
EN50160 states that under normal operating conditions, during each period of one week, 95% of the ten minute mean rms values of each individual
harmonic voltage shall be less than or equal to the value given in Table 9–2.
Additionally, the THD of the supply voltage shall be less than 8%.
Table 9–2: Values of individual harmonic voltages at the supply terminals for orders up to 25 in % of nominal voltage
Odd Harmonics
Not Multiples of 3 Multiples of 3
Even Harmonics
Order h
Relative
Voltage
Order h
Relative
Voltage
Order h
Relative
Voltage
5
7
11
13
6%
5%
3.5%
3%
3
9
15
21
5%
1.5%
0.5%
0.5%
2
4
6...24
2%
1%
0.5%
17
19
23
25
2%
1.5%
1.5%
NOTE: No values are given for harmonics of order higher than 25, as they are usually small, but largely unpredictable because of resonance effects.
System Configuration and Status
Registers
Table 9–3 lists registers for system configuration and status evaluation.
Table 9–3: System Configuration and Status Registers
Register Number
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Enable/Disable EN50160 Evaluation
0 = Disable (default)
1 = Enable
Nominal Voltage, (copied from register 3234 for reference)
Default = 230
Voltage Selection for 4-Wire Systems
0 = Line-to-Neutral (default)
1 = Line-to-Line
Nominal Frequency, Hz (copied from register 3208 for reference)
Default = 60
Frequency configuration
0 = system with synchronous connection to interconnected system (default)
1 = system without synchronous connection to interconnected system
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
125
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
Table 9–3:
System Configuration and Status Registers (continued)
Register Number
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3914
3916
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
Description
First Day of Week
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday (default)
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
Definition of Interruption
0 – 10% Nominal (default = 1)
Allowable Range of Slow Voltage Variations
1 – 20% Nominal (default = 10)
Reserved
Reserved
Bitmap of active evaluations
Bit 00 – Summary bit – at least one EN50160 evaluation is active
Bit 01 – Frequency
Bit 02 – Supply voltage variations
Bit 03 – Magnitude of rapid voltage changes
Bit 04 – Flicker
Bit 05 – Supply voltage dips
Bit 06 – Short interruptions of the supply voltage
Bit 07 – Long interruptions of the supply voltage
Bit 08 – Temporary power frequency overvoltages
Bit 09 – Transient overvoltages
Bit 10 – Supply voltage unbalance
Bit 11 – Harmonic voltage
Bit 12 – THD
Bit 13 – Not used
Bit 14 – Not used
Bit 15 – Not used
Bitmap of evaluation status summary
Bit 00 – Summary bit – at least one EN50160 evaluation has failed.
Bit 01 – Frequency
Bit 02 – Supply voltage variations
Bit 03 – Magnitude of rapid voltage changes
Bit 04 – Flicker
Bit 05 – Supply voltage dips
Bit 06 – Short interruptions of the supply voltage
Bit 07 – Long interruptions of the supply voltage
Bit 08 – Temporary power frequency overvoltages
Bit 09 – Transient overvoltages
Bit 10 – Supply voltage unbalance
Bit 11 – Harmonic voltage
Bit 12 – THD
Bit 13 – Not used
Bit 14 – Not used
Bit 15 – Not used
Count of 10-second intervals present year
Count of 10-second intervals this week
Count of 10-minute intervals this week
126
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
Table 9–3:
System Configuration and Status Registers (continued)
Register Number
3917
3918
3919
3920
3930
3940
1
1
1
8
8
10
Description
Number of allowable rapid voltage changes per week
Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled
Number of allowable short interruptions per year
Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled
Number of allowable long interruptions per year
Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled
Number of allowable voltage dips per week for each range of Depth
Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled
Number of allowable overvoltages per week for each range of Magnitude
Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled
Number of allowable transient overvoltages per week for each range of Magnitude
Default = -32768 = Pass/Fail evaluation disabled
Evaluation Data Available Over a
Communications Link
Portal Registers Evaluation data is available over communications via “portal” register reads.
Each data item is assigned a portal register number. A block read of the specified size at that address will return the data for that item. In general, if the block size is smaller than specified, the data returned will be 0x8000
(-32768) to indicate the data is invalid. If the block size is larger than specified, the data for the item will be returned and the remaining registers
will be padded with 0x8000. Refer to Table 9–4 for portal register
descriptions.
Table 9–4: Portal Register Descriptions
Portal
38270
Description Size Data
Evaluation Summary
Bitmap
18
Register 1 – Bitmap of active evaluations (same as register 3910)
Bit set when evaluation is active
Bit 00 – Summary bit – at least one EN50160 evaluation is active
Bit 01 – Frequency
Bit 02 – Supply voltage variations
Bit 03 – Magnitude of rapid voltage changes
Bit 04 – Flicker
Bit 05 – Supply voltage dips
Bit 06 – Short interruptions of the supply voltage
Bit 07 – Long interruptions of the supply voltage
Bit 08 – Temporary power frequency overvoltages
Bit 09 – Transient overvoltages
Bit 10 – Supply voltage unbalance
Bit 11 – Harmonic voltage
Bit 12 – THD
Bit 13 – Not used
Bit 14 – Not used
Bit 15 – Not used
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
127
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 9–4:
Portal Register Descriptions (continued)
Portal Description Size Data
Register 3 (Range 1)/Register 11 (Range 2) – Bitmap of evaluation status of individual evaluations
Bit 00 – Frequency
Bit 01 – Va
Bit 02 – Vb
Bit 03 – Vc
Bit 04 – Flicker Va
Bit 05 – Flicker Vb
Bit 06 – Flicker Vc
Bit 07 – Voltage Unbalance
Bit 08 – THD Va
Bit 09 – THD Vb
Bit 10 – THD Vc
Bit 11 – Va H2
Bit 12 – Va H3
Bit 13 – Va H4
Bit 14 – Va H5
Bit 15 – Va H6
Register 5 (Range 1)/Register 13 (Range 2) – Bitmap of evaluation status of individual evaluations
Bit 00 – Va H23
Bit 01 – Va H24
Bit 02 – Va H25
Bit 03 – Vb H2
Bit 04 – Vb H3
Bit 05 – Vb H4
Bit 06 – Vb H5
Bit 07 – Vb H6
Bit 08 – Vb H7
Bit 09 – Vb H8
Bit 10 – Vb H9
Bit 11 – Vb H10
Bit 12 – Vb H11
Bit 13 – Vb H12
Bit 14 – Vb H13
Bit 15 – Vb H14
Register 7 (Range 1)/Register 15 (Range 2) – Bitmap of evaluation status of individual evaluations
Bit 00 – Vc H7
Bit 01 – Vc H8
Bit 02 – Vc H9
Bit 03 – Vc H10
Bit 04 – Vc H11
Bit 05 – Vc H12
Bit 06 – Vc H13
Bit 07 – Vc H14
Bit 08 – Vc H15
Bit 09 – Vc H16
Bit 10 – Vc H17
Bit 11 – Vc H18
Bit 12 – Vc H19
Bit 13 – Vc H20
Bit 14 – Vc H21
Bit 15 – Vc H22
128
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
Table 9–4:
Portal Register Descriptions (continued)
Portal
38271 – 38390
38391 – 38393
38394 – 38396
38397 – 38399
Description Size Data
Summary of Meter
Data Evaluations by
Item
33
Summary of Rapid
Voltage Changes by
Phase
12
Summary of Voltage
Dips by Phase This
Week
104
Summary of Voltage
Dips by Phase Last
Week
104
Register 9 (Range 1)/Register 17 (Range 2) – Bitmap of evaluation status of individual evaluations
Bit 00 – Ib H7
Bit 01 – Ic H7
Bit 02 – Ia H9
Bit 03 – Ib H9
Bit 04 – Ic H9
Bit 05 – Ia H11
Bit 06 – Ib H11
Bit 07 – Ic H11
Bit 08 – Ia H13
Bit 09 – Ib H13
Bit 10 – Ic H13
Bit 11 – Reserved
Bit 12 – Reserved
Bit 13 – Reserved
Bit 14 – Reserved
Bit 15 – Reserved
Register number of Metered Quantity (can be used to confirm data item being reported)
Register value (present metered value)
Average value (at end of last completed averaging time period)
Minimum value during the last completed averaging time period
Maximum value during the last completed averaging time period
Minimum value during this interval
Maximum value during this interval
Minimum value during the last interval
Maximum value during the last interval
Percent in Evaluation Range 1 this interval
Percent in Evaluation Range 2 this interval (when applicable)
Percent in Evaluation Range 1 last interval
Percent in Evaluation Range 2 last interval (when applicable)
Count of average values in Evaluation Range 1 (MOD10L2)
Count of average values in Evaluation Range 2 (MOD10L2)
Count of total valid averages for Evaluation of Range 1 (MOD10L2)
Count of total valid averages for Evaluation of Range 2 (MOD10L2)
Date/Time Last Excursion Range 1 (4-register format)
Date/Time Last Excursion Range 2 (4-register format)
Date/Time Last Reset (4-register format)
Count of rapid voltage increases this week
Count of rapid voltage decreases this week
Count of rapid voltage increases last week
Count of rapid voltage decreases last week
Date/Time last rapid voltage change (4-register format)
Date/Time last reset (4-register format)
Date/Time last voltage dip (4-register format)
Date/Time last reset (4-register format)
Date/Time last voltage dip (4-register format)
Date/Time last reset (4-register format)
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
129
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 9–4:
Portal Register Descriptions (continued)
Portal
38400 – 38403
38404 – 38406
38407 – 38409
38410 – 38412
38413 – 38415
Description
Summary of Supply
Voltage Interruptions
3-Phase and by
Phase
34
Temporary Power
Frequency
Overvoltages by
Phase This Week
Temporary Power
Frequency
Overvoltages by
Phase Last Week
Transient
Overvoltages by
Phase This Week
Transient
Overvoltages by
Phase Last Week
Size Data
104
104
88
88
Flag indicating interruption is active
Elapsed seconds for interruption in progress
Count of short interruptions this year
Count of long interruption this year
Count of short interruptions last year
Count of long interruptions last year
Date/Time of last interruption (4-register format)
Date/Time of last reset (4-register format)
Count of overvoltages by magnitude & duration this week (96 values) [See “Detecting and Classifying
Temporary Power Frequency Overvoltages” on page 121.]
Date/Time last overvoltage (4-register format)
Date/Time last reset (4-register format)
Count of overvoltages by magnitude & duration last week (96 values) [See “Detecting and Classifying
Temporary Power Frequency Overvoltages” on page 121.]
Date/Time last overvoltage (4-register format)
Date/Time last reset (4-register format)
Date/Time last transient overvoltage (4-register format)
Date/Time last reset (4-register format)
Date/Time last transient overvoltage (4-register format)
Date/Time last reset (4-register format)
Viewing EN50160 Evaluations Web
Pages
Setting Up EN50160 Evaluation
You can view EN50160 Evaluations on web pages. Refer to the
POWERLOGIC Web Pages instruction bulletin 63230-304-207.
In order to set up the EN50160 evaluation in the circuit monitor, you must complete the following tasks:
1. Enable the EN50160 evaluation.
By default, the EN50160 evaluation is disabled. For instructions on
enabling, see “Enabling the EN50160 Evaluation” on page 131.
2. Select the nominal voltage of your system.
The EN50160 standard defines nominal voltage for low-voltage systems to be 230V line-to-line for 3-wire systems or 230V line-to-neutral for
4-wire systems. Therefore, the default value for Nominal Voltage is 230.
If the application is a medium-voltage system or if you want the evaluations to be based on some other nominal voltage, you can configure this value using the display only. System Manager Software does not allow configuration of nominal voltage.
3. Change the nominal frequency of your system if you are evaluating a
50 Hz system.
The EN50160 standard defines nominal frequency as 50 Hz, but the circuit monitor can also evaluate 60 Hz systems. It cannot evaluate nominal frequency for 400 Hz systems. The default nominal frequency in the circuit monitor is 60 Hz. To change the default, from the display Main
130
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Enabling the EN50160 Evaluation
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
Menu, select Setup > Meter > Frequency. From SMS software, see the online help file.
4. Reset the EN50160 Statistics.
a. Write 9999 in register 8001.
b. Write 11100 in register 8000.
Refer to “Resetting Statistics” on page 123.
Enabling the EN50160 Evaluation is performed using the Power Quality
menu (see below). Table 9–5 shows the available options.
Table 9–5: Options for Enabling EN50160 Evaluation
Option
EN50160 Enable
Nom. Voltage
IEC61000 Enable
Available Values
Y or N
0-1.5
*
PT Primary
Y or N
Selection Description
Set to enable or disable the EN50160 Evaluation.
Set power system nominal line-to-line voltage
Set to enable or disable the IEC Mode
Default
N
230
N
Selecting Nominal Voltage
To enable the EN50160 evaluation from the display, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Meter > Power Quality.
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable N
Nom. Voltage 230
IEC61000 Enable N
CM4250
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable N
Nom. Voltage 230
Flicker
CM4000T
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable
Nom. Voltage
N
230
CM4000
2. EN50160 is selected. Press the enter button . “N” begins to blink.
Use the up arrow button to scroll change from “N” to “Y.” Then, press the enter button.
3. Use the arrow button to select the other option on the menu, or if you are finished, press the menu button to save.
To set up Nominal Voltage from the display, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Meter > Power Quality.
The POWER QUALITY screen displays.
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable N
Nom. Voltage 230
IEC61000 Enable N
CM4250
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable N
Nom. Voltage 230
Flicker
CM4000T
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable
Nom. Voltage
N
230
CM4000
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the Nominal Voltage option.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
131
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
3. Press the enter button to select the value. The value begins to blink.
Use the arrow buttons to set the nominal voltage value. Then, press the enter button to select the new value.
4. Use the arrow buttons to select the other option on the menu, or if you are finished, press the menu button to save.
Selecting IEC61000 Mode (CM4250 only) To set up IEC61000 mode from the display, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Meter > Power Quality.
The POWER QUALITY screen displays.
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable
Nom. Voltage
IEC61000 Enable
N
230
N
Selecting Flicker (CM4000T only)
132
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the IEC 61000 option.
3. Press the enter button . “N” begins to blink. Use the up arrow button to scroll change from “N” to “Y.” Then, press the enter button.
4. Use the arrow button to select the other option on the menu, or if you are finished, press the menu button to save.
NOTE: IEC61000 mode requires firmware version 14.000 or later.
NOTE: Remember to change the circuit monitor’s nominal frequency, if
necessary, and to reset the registers for EN50160 statistics. See “Setting
Up EN50160 Evaluation” on page 130 for details.
To set up Flicker from the display, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Meter > Power Quality.
The POWER QUALITY screen displays.
POWER QUALITY
EN50160 Enable N
Nom. Voltage 230
Flicker
CM4000T only
2. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the Flicker option.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
3. Press the enter button is displayed.
to select the value. The Setup Flicker screen
SETUP FLICKER
Pst interval 10 Min
No. Pst in PH
Enable
Start time
12
Yes
0
4. Each value begins to blink when it is selected. Use the arrow buttons to set new values. Then, press the enter button to select the new value.
5. When you are finished, press the menu button to save.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
133
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 9—Disturbance Monitoring
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
134
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 10—Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CHAPTER 10—MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
CIRCUIT MONITOR MAINTENANCE
The circuit monitor does not require regular maintenance, nor does it contain any user-serviceable parts. If the circuit monitor requires service, contact your local sales representative. Do not open the circuit monitor.
Opening the circuit monitor voids the warranty.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Do not attempt to service the circuit monitor. CT and PT inputs may contain hazardous currents and voltages. Only authorized service personnel from the manufacturer should service the circuit monitor.
Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not perform a Dielectric (Hi-Pot) or Megger test on the circuit monitor.
High voltage testing of the circuit monitor may damage the unit. Before performing Hi-Pot or Megger testing on any equipment in which the circuit monitor is installed, disconnect all input and output wires to the circuit monitor.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
135
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 10—Maintenance and Troubleshooting
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CIRCUIT MONITOR MEMORY
The circuit monitor uses its nonvolatile memory (RAM) to retain all data and metering configuration values. Under the operating temperature range specified for the circuit monitor, this nonvolatile memory has an expected life of up to 100 years. The circuit monitor stores its data logs on a memory chip, which has a life expectancy of up to 20 years under the operating temperature range specified for the circuit monitor. The life of the circuit monitor’s internal battery-backed clock is over 20 years at 25°C.
NOTE: Life expectancy is a function of operating conditions; this does not constitute any expressed or implied warranty.
Upgrading Memory in the Circuit Monitor
The circuit monitor standard memory is 16 MB, but can be easily expanded to 32 MB. Contact your local Square D/Schneider Electric representative for availability of the memory upgrade chips. The memory chip is accessible through the access door on the side of the circuit monitor as illustrated in
Figure 10–1. See the instruction bulletin provided with the memory
expansion kit for instructions on removal and installation of the memory chip.
Figure 10–1:Memory chip location in the circuit monitor
Memory Chip
136
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 10—Maintenance and Troubleshooting
IDENTIFYING THE FIRMWARE VERSION
You can upgrade the circuit monitor’s firmware through any of these ports:
•
RS-485 port
•
RS-232 port
•
Infrared ports on the VFD display
•
Ethernet communications card
To determine the firmware version of the circuit monitor’s operating system from the remote display, do this:
From the main menu, select Diagnostics > Meter Information. The information about your meter displays on the Meter Information screen.
Your screen may vary slightly.
METER INFORMATION
Model #
Serial #
CM4000
XXXXXXXX
DOM
Reset Rev
6/9/2000
10.600
OS Rev 12.840
Language Rev 12.100
Display Rev 5.3
Revenue Secure Off
Total Disk MB 16
VIEWING THE DISPLAY IN DIFFERENT
LANGUAGES
CALIBRATION OF THE
CURRENT/VOLTAGE MODULE
GETTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT
To determine the firmware version over the communication link, use
SMS
to perform a System Communications Test. The firmware version is listed in the firmware revision (F/ W Revision) column.
The circuit monitor can be configured to display text in various languages.
Language files are installed using the DLF-3000 software application. To obtain and use language files, refer to the DLF-3000 documentation.
Contact your local sales representative for information on calibration of the current/voltage module on the circuit monitor.
Please refer to the Technical Support Contacts provided in the circuit monitor shipping carton for a list of support phone numbers by country.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
137
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 10—Maintenance and Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The information in Table 10–1 describes potential problems and their
possible causes. It also describes checks you can perform or possible solutions for each. After referring to this table, if you cannot resolve the problem, contact the your local Square D/Schneider Electric sales representative for assistance.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• This equipment must be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel.
• Qualified persons performing diagnostics or troubleshooting that require electrical conductors to be energized must comply with
NFPA 70 E - Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplaces and OSHA Standards - 29 CFR Part 1910
Subpart S - Electrical.
• Carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left inside the equipment.
• Use caution while removing or installing panels so that they do not extend into the energized bus; avoid handling the panels, which could cause personal injury.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Table 10–1: Troubleshooting
Potential Problem
The red maintenance
LED
is illuminated on the circuit monitor.
Possible Cause Possible Solution
When the red maintenance
LED
is illuminated, it indicates a potential hardware or firmware problem in the circuit monitor.
When the red maintenance LED is illuminated,
“Maintenance LED” is added to the menu under
“Diagnostics.” Error messages display to indicate the reason the LED is illuminated. Note these error messages and call Technical Support or contact your local sales representative for assistance.
The green control power LED is not illuminated on the circuit monitor.
The circuit monitor is not receiving the necessary power.
Verify that the circuit monitor line (L) and neutral (N) terminals (terminals 25 and 27) are receiving the necessary power.
The display is blank after applying control power to the circuit monitor.
The display is not receiving the necessary power or communications signal from the circuit monitor.
Verify that the display cable is properly inserted into the connectors on the display and the circuit monitor.
138
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 10–1: Troubleshooting (continued)
Circuit monitor is grounded incorrectly.
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 10—Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Incorrect setup values.
The data being displayed is inaccurate or not what you expect.
Incorrect voltage inputs.
Circuit monitor is wired improperly.
Circuit monitor address is incorrect.
Circuit monitor baud rate is incorrect.
Cannot communicate with circuit monitor from a remote personal computer.
Communications lines are improperly connected.
Communications lines are improperly terminated.
Incorrect route statement to circuit monitor.
Verify that the circuit monitor is grounded as described in
“Grounding the Circuit Monitor” in the installation manual.
Check that the correct values have been entered for circuit monitor setup parameters (CT and PT ratings, System
Type, Nominal Frequency, and so on). See “Setting Up the
Metering Functions of the Circuit Monitor” on page 17 for
setup instructions.
Check circuit monitor voltage input terminals (9, 10, 11,12) to verify that adequate voltage is present.
Check that all CTs and PTs are connected correctly
(proper polarity is observed) and that they are energized.
Check shorting terminals. See “Wiring CTs, PTs, and
Control Power to the Circuit Monitor” in the installation manual for wiring diagrams. Initiate a wiring check from the circuit monitor display.
Check to see that the circuit monitor is correctly
addressed. See “RS-485, RS-232, and Infrared Port
Communications Setup” on page 12 for instructions.
Verify that the baud rate of the circuit monitor matches the baud rate of all other devices on its communications link.
See “RS-485, RS-232, and Infrared Port Communications
Setup” on page 12 for instructions.
Verify the circuit monitor communications connections.
Refer to
Chapter 6—
Communications in the installation manual for more information.
Check to see that a multipoint communications terminator is properly installed. See “Terminating the
Communications Link” in the installation manual for instructions.
Check the route statement. Refer to the SMS online help for instructions on defining route statements.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
139
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 10—Maintenance and Troubleshooting
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
140
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
CHAPTER 11—TRANSIENT CIRCUIT MONITOR (CM4000T)
TRANSIENT CIRCUIT MONITOR
DESCRIPTION
WHAT ARE TRANSIENTS?
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
The CM4000T circuit monitor has most of the same metering capabilities as the CM4250. However, it also has the ability to detect and capture submicrosecond voltage transients up to a peak voltage of 10,000 volts (L-L). It accomplishes this by using the transient version of the current/voltage module.
The transient detection module, or CVMT, contains the entire front end of the meter necessary to perform both standard metering, as defined by the
CM4250, and the high-speed data acquisition necessary to perform highspeed impulsive voltage transient detection.
The CM4000T also has the ability to measure voltage fluctuations (flicker) based on IEC 61000-4-15 (2003) standards (230 V, 50 Hz systems and
120 V, 60 Hz systems). See “Flicker” later in this chapter for more
information.
Attaching the CVMT module allows the capture, storage, and viewing of sub-microsecond voltage events. Additionally, it allows for the logging of voltage transient peaks, average voltage, rise time, and duration.
A transient is defined as a disturbance in the electrical system lasting less that one cycle. There are two types of transients: impulsive and oscillatory.
An impulsive transient is defined as a sudden, non-power frequency change in the steady state condition of voltage or current that is unidirectional in polarity. Lightning strikes are a common cause of impulsive transients.
Oscillatory (also known as switching) transients include both positive and negative polarity values. Energizing capacitor banks will typically result in an oscillatory transient on one or more phases.
Each type of transient is divided into three sub-categories related to the
frequencies. Table 11–1 lists the transients and their three categories.
Table 11–1: Transient Categories and Sub-Categories
Transient Categories
Spectral
Components
Duration
Impulsive
Millisecond (Low Frequency)
Microsecond (Medium Frequency)
Nanosecond (High Frequency)
Oscillatory
Low Frequency
Medium Frequency
High Frequency
0.1 ms rise
1 µs rise
5 ns rise
< 5 kHz
5 to 500 kHz
0.5 to 5 MHz
> 1 ms
50 ns to 1 ms
< 50 ns
0.3 to 50 ms
5 µs to 20 µs
5 µs
NOTE: Impulsive transients are characterized by their rise time, amplitude, and duration. Oscillatory transients are characterized by their frequency duration.
Low frequency transients are the most common, followed by medium frequency transients. While damage can be immediate in cases such as lightning, the CM4000T monitors and alerts you to the lower-to-medium frequency transients which can slowly damage components. Early detection
141
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
IMPULSIVE TRANSIENT ALARMS
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
of repetitive transients can allow you (in many instances) to take action before your components are damaged.
The CM4000T provides an additional alarm group for detecting impulsive transients on the voltage inputs. The Impulsive Transient alarm operates differently than the other alarms, yet it provides extensive information about impulsive transients in an electrical system. The Impulsive Transient alarm does not prevent the use of any other alarms. All alarm groups will function concurrently and can trigger concurrent data records.
Detection and capture of high-speed transients are in the nanosecond to microsecond range with a total capture duration of up to 2 milliseconds.
Slower events can be recorded using the standard disturbance event- capture capabilities of the meter.
There is only one alarm to configure to detect impulsive and oscillatory transients on the three-phase voltage channels in the CM4000T circuit monitor. The transient alarm is in Alarm Position 185 (registers 13980 –
13999). Each transient that is detected forces an entry in the alarm log and forces a transient and disturbance waveform capture if waveform capture is
enabled (refer to “Logging” on page 101 and “Waveform and Event
Capture” on page 107 for more information about alarm logs and
Table 11–2: Transient Alarm Type Description
Type
185
Description Operation
Impulsive Transient -
Voltage
The impulsive transient voltage alarm will occur whenever the peak voltage is above the pickup setpoint and remains above the pickup setpoint for the specified duration.
Configuring a Transient Alarm
Recording and Analyzing Data
142
To configure a transient alarm, you must select the voltage inputs to monitor. The impulsive transient alarm allows you to enter a custom label, enable or disable the alarm, select the alarm’s priority, enter the voltage pickup threshold, and input the minimum pulse width.
The CM4000T automatically selects the voltage transient monitoring method based on the type of system it is connected to, so there is no need to configure the system type. For example, if the CM4000T is connected to a 4-wire wye system, the detection method changes to single-ended (L-N) with a maximum voltage range of 5 kV peak (3536 V rms). If the CM4000T is connected to a 3-wire delta system, the detection method changes to differential (L-L) with a maximum voltage range of 10 kV peak (7072 V rms).
After each occurrence of an impulsive transient, data is entered into the circuit monitor’s alarm log using SMS as long as the alarm priority is set to
Low, Medium, or High. The alarm log contains the following information:
•
Alarm position
•
Unique alarm ID
•
Entry type
•
Peak Magnitude
•
Start time and date
•
Correlation sequence number
•
File association
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Creating an Impulsive Transient Alarm
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
•
Waveform capture association
•
Average magnitude
•
Transient duration
•
Rise time
the SMS online help.
Using the display, perform the steps below to configure the impulsive transient alarm:
NOTE: There is a default transient alarm that enables detection on all phases. If the label and phases are acceptable, you can skip this section and
go directly to “Setting Up and Editing Transient Alarms” on page 146.
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup. The password prompt appears.
2. Select your password. The default password is 0. The Setup menu is displayed.
SETUP
Date & Time
Display
Communications
Meter
Alarm
I/O
Passwords
3. Select Alarm. The Alarm menu displays.
ALARM
Edit Parameters
Create Custom
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
143
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
4. Select Create Custom. The Create Custom menu appears.
CREATE CUSTOM
Standard 1 sec
High Speed 100ms
Disturbance < cycle
Digital
Boolean
Transient
Waveshape
5. Select Transient. The Select Position menu appears.
SELECT POSITION
*01 Impulsive Tran
6. Select the position of the new transient alarm. The Alarm Parameters
menu displays. Table 11–3 describes the options on this menu.
ALARM PARAMETERS
Lbl: Impulsive Trans
Qty All Phases
Table 11–3: Options for Creating a Transient Alarm
Option
Lbl
Type
Available Values
Alphanumeric
Up to 15 characters
Selection Description
The alarm type is configured by default and cannot be changed.
Default
Label - name of the alarm. Press the down arrow button to scroll through the alphabet. The lower-case letters are presented first, then upper-case, then numbers and symbols. Press the enter button to select a letter and move to the next character field. To move to the next option, press the menu button.
Impulsive
Trans
Imp.
Voltage
144
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
Table 11–3: Options for Creating a Transient Alarm (continued)
Option
Qty
Available Values
All Phases
Ph. A
Ph. B
Ph. A&B
Ph. C
Ph. A&C
Ph. B&C
Selection Description
For transient alarms, this is the value to be evaluated. While selected, press the arrow buttons to scroll through quantity options. Pressing the enter button while an option is displayed will activate that option’s list of values. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the list of options. Select an option by pressing the enter button.
Default
All Phases
For 3-wire systems, selecting Phase A will configure the transient alarm to monitor V
A-B
. If you select Phases A&B, the transient alarm will monitor V
A-
B
and V
B-C.
7. Press the menu button until “Save Changes? No” flashes on the display.
Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save the changes. Now you are ready to set up and edit the newly-created transient alarm.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
145
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Setting Up and Editing Transient Alarms
Follow the instructions below to set up and edit a transient alarm:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Alarm > Edit Parameters. The Edit
Parameters menu displays.
EDIT PARAMETERS
Standard
High Speed
Disturbance
Digital
Boolean
Transient
Waveshape
2. Select Transient. The Select Alarm menu displays.
SELECT ALARM
01 Impulsive Tran
146
EDIT ALARM
Lbl:Impulsive Trans
Enable
Priority
No
No
Thresh.(rms) 0
Min Pulse (us) 0
4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the menu option you want to change, then edit the following alarms: Lbl., Priority, Thresh. (rms), and Min.
Pulse (µs). See Table 11–4 for a description of the alarm options.
NOTE: Do not enable the alarm during this step. The alarm must be enabled after all changes have been saved.
5. When you are finished with all changes, press the menu button until
“Save Changes? No” flashes on the display. Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save the changes.
6. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Alarm > Edit Parameters >
Transients. The Select Alarm menu displays.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
SELECT ALARM
Impulsive Tran
EDIT ALARM
Lbl: Impulsive Trans
Enable
Priority
No
No
Thresh. (rms)
Min. Pulse (µs)
0
0
8. Verify that the Priority, Thresh. (rms), and Min. Pulse (µs) alarm options are set to the values you entered earlier.
9. Use the arrow buttons to scroll to the Enable options, then select Yes to enable the alarm. Verify that Yes is selected before proceeding.
10. Press the menu button until “Save Changes? No” flashes on the display.
Select Yes with the arrow button, then press the enter button to save the changes.
NOTE: The Impulsive Transient alarm will be automatically disabled if invalid setpoints (threshold and minimum pulse width) are entered. If you are unable to enable the alarm, check your system configuration (system type, connection, VT ratio) and your alarm setpoints to ensure that the transient
circuit monitor operates as intended. Refer to Table 11–5 for minimum and
maximum setpoint information.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
147
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table 11–4: Options for Editing a Transient Alarm
Option
Lbl
Enable
Priority
Thresh. (rms)
Min. Pulse
(µ s)
Available Values Selection Description
Alphanumeric
Default
Label - name of the alarm. Press the down arrow button to scroll through the alphabet. The lower case letters are presented first, then uppercase, then numbers and symbols. Press the enter button to select a letter and move to the next character field. To move to the next option, press the menu button.
Name of the alarm
Yes
No
Select Y to make the alarm available for use by the circuit monitor. On preconfigured alarms, the alarm may already be enabled. Select N to make the alarm function unavailable to the circuit monitor.
N
(not enabled)
None
High
Med
Low
Low the lowest priority alarm. High is the highest priority alarm and also places the active alarm in the list of high priority alarms. To view this list from the Main Menu, select Alarms > High Priority Alarms.
None
0 - 23,173
0 - 40
µ s
The transient alarm threshold or pickup value is set in rms and bounded by system configuration. The minimum value for the transient alarm threshold (pickup) is dependent on the system type and connection
3430 V (rms)
4850 V (peak)
To ensure accurate detection, this value can range from 0 to 40
µ s. A transient pulse width must meed the minimum pulse width requirements to trigger the alarm and capture waveforms.
0
Table 11–5: Minimum and Maximum Setpoints for System Wiring Types
System
Wiring
System Connection
4-wire Wye Direct connect (L-N)
3-wire Delta Direct connect (L-L)
4-wire Wye VTs
3-wire Delta VTs
Minimum Threshold (Setpoint), RMS
0 V
0 V
0 V
0V
Maximum Threshold (Setpoint), RMS
3430 V
5940 V
Primary ratio x 3430
Example: 288:120 = 2.4
2.4 x 3430 = 8232 maximum setpoint
Primary ratio x 5940
Example: 288:120 = 2.4
2.4 x 6860 = 16,464 maximum setpoint
148
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
IMPULSIVE TRANSIENT LOGGING
Transient Analysis Information
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
Each time an impulsive transient occurs, the transient alarm forces an entry in the CM4000T alarm log, a transient and disturbance waveform capture is generated when waveform capture is enabled, and register-based data in non-volatile memory is recorded. The register-based data in the alarm log consists of the following:
•
Date/Time
•
Unique ID
•
Peak voltage magnitude
•
Duration of the peak in tenths of a microsecond
•
Rise-time in tenths of a microsecond
•
Average voltage
The data can be viewed by selecting View Alarm > Active Alarm List, then
selecting the transient alarm. See Operation on page 7 for information on
how to view the alarm log data using the display.
Register-based transient analysis information is also generated each time an impulsive transient occurs. This data consists of the number of transients for each phase, the date and time of the last register-based transient alarm log reset, number of alarms in the register-based transient alarm log, stress on circuit indication for each phase in volt-seconds, magnitude, and duration. The following list contains the transient analysis information.
•
Number of transients on Phase A
•
Number of transients on Phase B
•
Number of transients on Phase C
•
Number of transients on all phases
•
Date/time of the last register-based alarm log reset
•
Number of alarms in the register-based transient alarm log
•
Stress on the circuit indication for Phase A (volt-seconds)
•
Stress on the circuit indication for Phase B (volt-seconds)
•
Stress on the circuit indication for Phase C (volt-seconds)
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 1 and Duration 1
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 1 and Duration 2
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 1 and Duration 3
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 2 and Duration 1
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 2 and Duration 2
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 2 and Duration 3
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 3 and Duration 1
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 3 and Duration 2
•
Transient categorization – Magnitude 3 and Duration 3
NOTE: Data log entries and adaptive waveform captures cannot be triggered by an impulsive transient event because transient occur too rapidly for these data capture tools to be effective. However, high-speed alarms and sag/swell alarms can still be configured to trigger if the transient event duration is within the detection criteria for the alarm.
To utilize all of the transient analysis features of the CM4000T you should configure the transient categorization magnitude and duration setpoints.
The CM4000T provides nine accumulators that evaluate each captured transient and assigns it to a category based on magnitude and duration. For example, a 480 V Wye system might have a Transient Alarm Threshold
149
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
Writing Transient Register Values
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
(pick-up) setpoint of 600 V rms (848 V peak). Transient captures for L-N connected systems is 5 kV (peak). Therefore, all captured transient magnitudes will be between 848 V peak and 5 k V peak. The Magnitude #1
(register 9226) and Magnitude #3 (register 9227) parameters for the
Transient Categories might be configured as 1471 V peak (5 kV – 848) *
15% + 848) which would include transients in the lower 15% in magnitude.
Magnitude #3 might be configured as 2509 V peak (5 kV – 848) * 40% +
848) which includes transients in the upper 60% in magnitude. Magnitude
#2 is implied as those transients > 15% of the range to < 40% of the range.
Much like Magnitude #1 and Magnitude #3, values for Duration #1 (register
9228) and Duration #3 (register 9229) must be configured. We recommend that Duration #1 is set to 32 µs and Duration #3 is set to 130 µs. This implies that all transients with duration < 32 µs will be considered Duration #1 and transients with duration > 130 µs will be Duration #3. Duration #2 is implied as those transients with a duration > 32 µs, but < 130 µs. See
The following is a list of the steps necessary to enter the transient register values. For more information on reading and writing registers, refer to
“Reading and Writing Registers” on page 48.
1. Write 9020 to register 8000 to enter Setup mode.
2. Write the desired value into the following registers (these values are in
Peak, not rms):
• 9226 for Magnitude #1
• 9227 for Magnitude #3
• 9228 for Duration #1
• 9229 for Duration #3
3. Write 1 to register 8001.
4. Write 9021 to register 8000 to exit Setup and save changes.
150
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
TRANSIENT WAVEFORM CAPTURES
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
Using waveform captures you can view each detected transient. Each time an impulsive transient event is detected, the CM4000T records two waveform captures when waveform capture is enabled. The first waveform capture is a transient waveform capture that records the signal on each of the three voltage inputs at a rate of 83,333 samples per cycle. The transient waveform capture will display voltage transients up to 5 kV peak magnitude for a 4-wire configuration and up to 10 kV for a L-L, 3-wire configuration when direct connected.
The second waveform capture is a disturbance waveform capture that is configured using the display or SMS. SMS will indicate all transient captures that are contained within each disturbance waveform capture. The disturbance waveform capture can range from seven channels at a rate of
512 samples per cycle for 28 cycles to seven channels at a rate of 16
samples per cycle for 915 cycles (see Table 11–6). It is recommended that
the disturbance waveform capture in a CM4000T be configured for 512 samples per cycle, which is one data point every 32 µs. This maximizes the available data for analysis of the transient event.
Table 11–6: Disturbance Waveform Capture Maximum Duration for the Number of Samples Per Cycle
Samples per Cycle
16
32
64
128
256
512
Max Duration
715 cycles
357 cycles
178 cycles
89 cycles
44 cycles
22 cycles
Table 11–7: Transient Waveform Capture Maximum Duration for the
Number of Samples Per Cycle
Samples per Cycle
100,000 (50 Hz system)
83,333 (60 Hz system)
Max Duration
2 millisecond (1/10 of a cycle)
2 millisecond (1/8 of a cycle)
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
151
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
Transient Waveform Capture Example
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The following figure is an example of a transient waveform capture. Below the figure is an explanation of the waveform capture.
Figure 11–1: Impulsive Transient
Peak magnitude
(peak volts)
Volts
(
≤ 10 kV)
Pickup setpoint (rms)
500 µs
Time
(0.1 µs)
AREA
Pickup setpoint (rms)
+
+
=
Pickup delay
=
Rise-time (0.1 µs)
+
=
Duration of peak (0.1 µs)
AREA
Average Value (volts) =
Duration
Volt-seconds = AREA
The CM4000T provides analysis data for each transient captured. Methods used to characterize transients include:
•
Peak Voltage
•
Energy (AREA)
•
Rise-time
•
Duration
Data provided by the CM4000T facilitates analysis using each of these methods. The meter reports a pickup date/time, rise-time, duration of the peak, peak magnitude, and average voltage of the transient. The CM4000T also provides an accumulated value per phase captured to indicate the
severity of the transients in volt-seconds. For example, Figure 11–1
illustrates an impulsive transient. The average voltage of the impulsive transient is calculated by taking the AREA, which includes the product of the voltage and duration within the transient curve bound by the threshold
(pickup and drop-out) setpoints, and dividing it by the duration of the peak.
152
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
FLICKER
Minimum Requirements
Standards
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
Using the transient module (CVMT) of a circuit monitor, you can detect and measure the modulation of electric light (called “flicker”). Under certain conditions, some individuals’ eyes are sensitive to flicker. Flicker occurs when electric light fluctuates because of variation in line voltage at certain frequencies. Interaction among varying loads and impedance of the electrical distribution system contribute to the line voltage variation that produces flicker.
Flicker can be a problem in a work environment such as a factory where large, cycling loads are present. It can also be a problem for residential customers of electric utilities, particularly residences located between an electrical substation and large commercial users of electrical power. As the commercial establishments cycle their large loads, the voltage supplied to the residences may vary markedly, causing the lights to flicker in the residences.
Flicker monitoring is available if you are using a circuit monitor equipped with a CVMT module (CM4000T). To measure flicker, the circuit monitor firmware must be version 12.32 or higher, and the CVMT firmware must be version 11.000 or higher.
You can find the latest firmware on our website at www.powerlogic.com. If you are not familiar with upgrading the firmware, contact your local
Schneider Electric representative for support.
The measurement of flicker in the circuit monitor is structured around the
IEC standards for flicker described in Table 11–8.
Table 11–8: Standards
Standard
IEC 61000-4-15
(2003)
Description
The circuit monitor is designed to measure flicker based on this standard for 230 V, 50 Hz systems or for 120 V, 60 Hz systems.
How the Circuit Monitor Handles Flicker
The circuit monitor detects and measures flicker on the electrical system based on the IEC 61000-4-15 standard. Two quantities are measured:
• short-term flicker (P st
)
• long-term flicker (P lt
)
The circuit monitor displays both of these quantities for each phase. In 4wire systems, it measures flicker line-to-neutral voltage, but in 3-wire systems, the circuit monitor measures line-to-internal meter reference, not
line-to-line voltage.
Short-term flicker is measured over a period of minutes. You can select the number of minutes that the circuit monitor will use to update short-term flicker (P st
). The default setting is 10 minutes, which is a generally accepted setting for the short-term flicker (P st
).
Long-term flicker (P lt
) is based on an integer multiple of the short-term flicker (P st
) interval. Long-term flicker (P number of short-term flicker (P st lt
) is recorded each time a specified
) updates occur. For example, if short-term flicker (P st
) is set to 10 minutes and long-term flicker (P lt
) is set to 12 (shortterm updates), then the long-term flicker (P lt
) is recorded every two hours
(10 minutes x 12 short-term intervals = 120 minutes). The default setting for
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
153
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
Setting Up Flicker from the Display
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
long-term flicker (P lt
) is 12 (120 minutes based on a short-term flicker (P interval of 10 minutes), which is a generally accepted value.
st
)
Short-term and long-term flicker data are backed up hourly to the memory of the circuit monitor. Consequently, in the event of control power loss to the circuit monitor, a maximum of one hour of data would be lost.
To setup flicker from the display, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select Setup > Meter > Flicker.
The Setup Flicker screen displays. Table 11–9 describes the options for
flicker setup.
SETUP FLICKER
Pst interval
No. Pst in Plt
Enable
Start Time
10 Min
12
No
0
2. Use the arrow buttons change. to scroll to the menu option you want to
3. Press the enter button to select the value. The value begins to blink. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the available values. Then, press the enter button to select the new value.
4. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the other options on the menu, or if you are finished, press the menu button to save. When you save the settings for flicker, the circuit monitor performs a reset. If flicker is enabled at power up, it takes the circuit monitor two minutes to begin populating the data on the display. The asterisks (*) will be replaced when data begins to populate the registers.
Table 11–9: Options for Flicker Setup
Option
Pst Interval
No. Pst in Plt
Enable
Start time
Available Values Selection Description
1, 5, 10, or 15 The number of minutes in which the short-term update is performed.
2–1000
Yes or No
0–1439
The number of short-term updates (P st
) required in a long-term update (P lt
). The combination of possible short-term intervals and the number of short-term intervals for longterm updates can create a long-term interval range from two minutes to approximately 10.5 days.
12
Yes enables the circuit monitor to begin updating the flicker measurements at the specified start time.
No disables flicker. The circuit monitor will not measure flicker, even if a start time and intervals are set up.
No
The start time is minutes from midnight and will begin at the specified start time if flicker is enabled. Note that zero (0) starts immediately and that the start time is relative to today. For example, if the time is currently 1:00 pm and the desired start time is 2:00 am, then you would enter 120. Measurement will start immediately rather than tomorrow morning at 2:00 am because this time has passed for today.
Changing the start time causes a reset only if the start time is after the present time of the circuit monitor.
0
Default
10
154
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Viewing Flicker Readings
Viewing Flicker Data Web Pages
Flicker Register List
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
After you have set up flicker and enabled it, you can view the flicker readings from the display. To do this, follow this step:
1. From the Main Menu, select Meters > Flicker. The Flicker screen displays.
SHORT-TERM
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
0.256
0.257
0.301
The values display for short-term flicker level for all three phases. Use the arrow buttons to scroll and view the short-term and long-term flicker values.
You can view flicker data on web pages. Refer to the POWERLOGIC Web
Pages instruction bulletin 63230-304-207.
The data registers and time stamps for the flicker registers are FIFO buffers.
The Master Register List is available for download at www.powerlogic.com.
NOTE: The CM4250 does not measure high-speed transients or flicker as described in this chapter.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
155
POWERLOGIC® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Chapter 11—Transient Circuit Monitor (CM4000T)
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
156
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
APPENDIX A—USING THE COMMAND INTERFACE
OVERVIEW OF THE COMMAND
INTERFACE
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
The circuit monitor provides a command interface, which you can use to issue commands that perform various operations such as controlling relays.
Table A–2 on page 158 lists the available commands. The command
interface is located in memory at registers 8000–8149. Table A–1 lists the
definitions for the registers.
Table A–1: Location of the command interface
Register
8000
8001–8015
8017
8018
8019
8020–8149
Description
This is the register where you write the commands.
These are the registers where you write the parameters for a command. Commands can have up to 15 parameters associated with them.
Status pointer to the user area. The status of the last command processed is placed in this register.
Results pointer to the user area. When an error occurs, the error code is placed in this register.
I/O data pointer to the user area. Use this register to point to data buffer registers where you can send additional data or return data.
These registers are for you (the user) to write information.
Depending on which pointer places the information in the register, the register can contain status (from pointer 8017), results (from pointer 8018), or data (from pointer 8019). The registers will contain information such as whether the function is enabled or disabled, set to fill and hold, start and stop times, logging intervals, and so forth.
By default, return data will start at 8020 unless you specify otherwise.
When registers 8017–8019 are set to zero, no values are returned. When any or all of these registers contain a value, the value in the register “points” to a target register, which contains the status, error code, or I/O data
(depending on the command) when the command is executed. Figure A–1
shows how these registers work.
NOTE: You determine the register location where results will be written.
Therefore, take care when assigning register values in the pointer registers; values may be corrupted when two commands use the same register.
Figure A–1: Command Interface Pointer Registers
Register 8017 8020
Register 8020
1 (status of the last command)
Register 8018 8021
Register 8019 8022
Register 8021 51
(error code caused by the last command)
Register 8022 0
(data returned by the last command)
157
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
Issuing Commands
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
To issue commands using the command interface, follow these general steps:
1. Write the related parameter(s) to the command parameter registers
8001–15.
2. Write the command code to command interface register 8000.
If no parameters are associated with the command, then you need only to
write the command code to register 8000. Table A–2 lists the command
codes that can be written to the command interface into register 8000.
Some commands have an associated registers where you write parameters for that command. For example, when you write the parameter 9999 to register 8001 and issue command code 3351, all relays will be energized if they are set up for external control.
Table A–2: Command Codes
Command
Code
1110
1210
Command Parameter
Register
None
None
Parameters
None
None
1310
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3340
3341
3350
3351
3361
3362
3363
3364
1410
1411
Relay Outputs
3310
3311
3320
3321
3330
8001
8002
8003
8004
8005
8006
None
None
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
8001
Month
Day
Year
Hour
Minute
Second
None
None
Relay Output Number
➀
Relay Output Number
➀
Relay Output Number
➀
Relay Output Number
➀
Relay Output Number
➀
Relay Output Number
➀
Relay Output Number
➀
9999
9999
Relay Output Number
➀
Relay Output Number
➀
None
None
Input Number
➀
Input Number
➀
None
None
None
Analog Output Number
➀
Analog Output Number
➀
Description
Causes soft reset of the unit (re-initializes the circuit monitor).
Clears the communications counters.
Sets the system date and time. Values for the registers are:
Month (1–12)
Day (1–31)
Year (4-digit, for example 2000)
Hour (Military time, for example 14 = 2:00pm)
Minute (1–59)
Second (1–59)
Disables the revenue security switch.
Enables the revenue security switch.
Configures relay for external control.
Configures relay for internal control.
De-energizes designated relay.
Energizes designated relay.
Releases specified relay from latched condition.
Releases specified relay from override control.
Places specified relay under override control.
De-energizes all relays.
Energizes all relays.
Resets operation counter for specified relay.
Resets the turn-on time for specified relay.
Resets the operation counter for all relays.
Resets the turn-on time for all relays.
Resets the operation counter for specified input.
Resets turn-on time for specified input.
Resets the operation counter for all inputs.
Resets turn-on time for all inputs.
Resets all counters and timers for all I/Os.
Disables specified analog output.
Enables specified analog output.
158
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table A–2: Command Codes (continued)
4210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5210
Command
Code
3380
3381
Resets
4110
Command Parameter
Register
8001
8002
Parameters
9999
9999
None
8001
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
1 = Voltage
2 = Current
3 = Both
None
None
None
None
5910 8001 Bitmap
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6320
6321
6910
Files
7510
7511
Setup
9020
8019
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
8001
8001
None
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
I/O Data Pointer
➁
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Files 1–16 to trigger
File Number
None
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
Description
Disables all analog outputs.
Enables all analog outputs.
Resets min/max.
Resets the register-based alarm logs.
Resets all demand registers.
Resets current demand.
Resets voltage demand.
Resets power demand.
Resets input demand.
Resets generic 1 demand for first group of 10 quantities.
Resets generic 2 demand for second group of 10 quantities.
Resets all min/max demand.
Resets current min/max demand.
Resets voltage min/max demand.
Resets power min/max demand.
Resets input min/max demand.
Resets generic 1 min/max demand.
Resets generic 2 min/max demand.
Start new demand interval.
Bit0 = Power Demand
1 = Current Demand
2 = Voltage Demand
3 = Input Metering Demand
4 = Generic Demand Profile 1
5 = Generic Demand Profile 2
Preset Accumulated Energies
Requires the IO Data Pointer to point to registers where energy preset values are entered. All Accumulated energy values must be entered in the order in which they occur in registers 1700 to 1727.
Clears all energies.
Clears all accumulated energy values.
Clears conditional energy values.
Clears incremental energy values.
Clears input metering accumulation.
Disables conditional energy accumulation.
Enables conditional energy accumulation.
Starts a new incremental energy interval.
Triggers data log entry. Bitmap where Bit 0 = Data Log 1, Bit 1 = Data
Log 2, Bit 2 = Data Log 3, etc.
Triggers single data log entry.
Enter into setup mode.
159
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table A–2: Command Codes (continued)
Command
Code
Command Parameter
Register
Parameters Description
9021 8001
1 = Save
2 = Do not save
Exit setup mode and save all changes.
11100 8001 9999 = Password Reset EN50160 Statistics
➀
You must write to register 8001 the number that identifies which output you would like to use. To determine the identifying number, refer to
“I/O Point Numbers” on page 160 for instructions.
➁
Data buffer location (register 8019) is the pointer to the first register where data will be stored. By default, return data begins at register 8020, although you can use any of the registers from 8020–8149. Take care when assigning pointers. Values may be corrupted if two commands
are using the same register.
I/O POINT NUMBERS
All inputs and outputs of the circuit monitor have a reference number and a label that correspond to the position of that particular input or output.
•
The reference number is used to manually control the input or output with the command interface.
•
The label is the default identifier that identifies that same input or output.
The label appears on the display, in
SMS, on the option card, and on the
I/O extender
.
Figure A–2 on page 161 shows the reference number and its label
equivalent.
160
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
Figure A–2: Identifying I/Os for the command interface
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35
I/O Point No.
"C" I/O Extender Label
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
– + – + – + – +
C8 C7 C6 C5
– + – + – + – +
C4 C3 C2 C1
BS4 BS3 BS2 BS1 BR0 BR3 BR2 BR1
AS4 AS3 AS2 AS1 AR0 AR3 AR2 AR1
IOC44 in Option Slot B
Point No. Label
19 = B-S1
20 = B-S2
21 = B-S3
22 = B-S4
23 = B-R1
24 = B-R2
25 = B-R3
26 = B-R0
IOC44 in Option Slot A
Point No. Label
3 = A-S1
4 = A-S2
5 = A-S3
6 = A-S4
7 = A-R1
8 = A-R2
9 = A-R3
10 = A-R0
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
161
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
OPERATING OUTPUTS FROM THE
COMMAND INTERFACE
USING THE COMMAND INTERFACE TO
CHANGE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
To operate an output from the command interface, first identify the relay using the I/O point number. Then, set the output to external control. For example, to energize the last output on Option Card B, write the commands as follows:
1. Write number 26 to register 8001.
2. Write command code 3310 to register 8000 to set the relay to external control.
3. Write command code 3321 to register 8000.
If you look in Table A–2 on page 158, you’ll see that command code 3310
sets the relay to external control and command code 3321 is listed as the command used to energize a relay. Command codes 3310–3381 are for use with inputs and outputs.
You can also use the command interface to change values in selected metering-related registers, such as synchronizing the time of day of the clock or resetting generic demand.
Two commands, 9020 and 9021, work together as part of the command interface procedure when you use it to change circuit monitor configuration.
You must first issue command 9020 to enter into setup mode, change the register, and then issue 9021 to save your changes and exit setup mode.
Only one setup session is allowed at a time. While in this mode, if the circuit monitor detects more than two minutes of inactivity, that is, if you do not write any register values or press any buttons on the display, the circuit monitor will timeout and restore the original configuration values. All changes will be lost. Also, if the circuit monitor loses power or communications while in setup mode, your changes will be lost.
The general procedure for changing configuration registers using the command interface is as follows:
1. Issue command 9020 in register 8000 to enter into the setup mode.
2. Make changes to the appropriate register by writing the new value to that register. Perform register writes to all registers that you want to
3. To save the changes, write the value 1 to register 8001.
NOTE: Writing any other value except 1 to register 8001 lets you exit setup mode without saving your changes.
4. Issue command 9021 in register 8000 to initiate the save and reset the circuit monitor.
For example, the procedure to change the demand interval for current is as follows:
1. Issue command code 9020.
2. Write the new demand interval to register 1801.
3. Write 1 to register 8001.
4. Issue command code 9021.
162
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CONDITIONAL ENERGY
Command Interface Control
Digital Input Control
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
Circuit monitor registers 1728–1744 are conditional energy registers.
Conditional energy can be controlled in one of two ways:
•
Over the communications link, by writing commands to the circuit monitor’s command interface, or
•
By a digital input—for example, conditional energy accumulates when the assigned digital input is on, but does not accumulate when the digital input is off.
The following procedures tell how to set up conditional energy for command interface control, and for digital input control. The procedures refer to register numbers and command codes. For a listing of command codes, see
Table A–2 on page 158 in this chapter.
Set Control—To set control of conditional energy to the command interface:
1. Write command code 9020 to register 8000.
2. In register 3227, set bit 6 to 1 (preserve other bits that are ON).
3. Write 1 to register 8001.
4. Write command code 9021 to register 8000.
Start—To start conditional energy accumulation, write command code 6321 to register 8000.
Verify Setup—To verify proper setup, read register 1794. The register should read 1, indicating conditional energy accumulation is ON.
Stop—To stop conditional energy accumulation, write command code 6320 to register 8000.
Clear—To clear all conditional energy registers (1728-1747), write command code 6212 to register 8000.
Set Control—To configure conditional energy for digital input control:
1. Write command code 9020 to register 8000.
2. In register 3227, set bit 6 to 0 (preserve other bits that are ON).
3. Configure the digital input that will drive conditional energy accumulation. For the appropriate digital input, write 3 to the Base +9 register.
4. Write 1 to register 8001.
5. Write command code 9021 to register 8000.
Clear—To clear all conditional energy registers (1728–1747), write command code 6212 to register 8000.
Verify Setup—To verify proper setup, read register 1794. The register should read 0 when the digital input is off, indicating that conditional energy accumulation is off. The register should read 1 when conditional energy accumulation is on.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
163
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
INCREMENTAL ENERGY
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The circuit monitor’s incremental energy feature allows you to define a start time, end time, and time interval for incremental energy accumulation. At the end of each incremental energy period, the following information is available:
•
Wh IN during the last completed interval (reg. 1748–1750)
•
VARh IN during the last completed interval (reg. 1751–1753)
•
Wh OUT during the last completed interval (reg. 1754–1756)
•
VARh OUT during the last completed interval (reg. 1757–1759)
•
VAh during the last completed interval (reg. 1760–1762)
•
Date/time of the last completed interval (reg. 1763–1766)
•
Peak kW demand during the last completed interval (reg. 1940)
•
Date/Time of Peak kW during the last interval (reg. 1941–1944)
•
Peak kVAR demand during the last completed interval (reg. 1945)
•
Date/Time of Peak kVAR during the last interval (reg. 1946–1949)
•
Peak kVA demand during the last completed interval (reg. 1950)
•
Date/Time of Peak kVA during the last interval (reg. 1951–1954)
The circuit monitor can log the incremental energy data listed above. This logged data provides all the information needed to analyze energy and power usage against present or future utility rates. The information is especially useful for comparing different time-of-use rate structures.
When using the incremental energy feature, keep the following points in mind:
•
Peak demands help minimize the size of the data log in cases of sliding or rolling demand. Shorter incremental energy periods make it easier to reconstruct a load profile analysis.
•
Since the incremental energy registers are synchronized to the circuit monitor clock, it is possible to log this data from multiple circuits and perform accurate totalizing.
Using Incremental Energy
Figure A–3: Increment Energy Example
9
10
End Time
12
11
1s t In terva l
3r d
In ter val
1
2
3
Start Time
8
4
7
2nd
Interval
6
5
1st Interval (7 hours) = 8:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m.
2nd Interval (7 hours) = 3:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.
3rd Interval (2 hours) = 10:00 p.m. to 12:00 a.m.
164
Incremental energy accumulation begins at the specified start time and ends at the specified end time. When the start time arrives, a new incremental energy period begins. The start and end time are specified in minutes from midnight. For example:
Interval: 420 minutes (7 hours)
Start time: 480 minutes (8:00 a.m.)
End time = 1440 minutes (12:00 a.m.)
The first incremental energy calculation will be from 8:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m.
(7 hours) as illustrated in Figure A–3. The next interval will be from 3:00
p.m. to 10:00 p.m., and the third interval will be from 10 p.m. to 12:00 a.m. because 12:00 a.m. is the specified end time. A new interval will begin on the next day at 8:00 a.m. Incremental energy accumulation will continue in this manner until the configuration is changed or a new interval is started by a remote master.
Set up—To set up incremental energy:
1. Write command code 9020 to register 8000.
2. In register 3230, write a start time (in minutes-from-midnight).
3. For example, 8:00 am is 480 minutes.
4. In register 3231, write an end time (in minutes-from-midnight).
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
SETTING UP INDIVIDUAL HARMONIC
CALCULATIONS
CHANGING SCALE FACTORS
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
5. Write the desired interval length, from 0–1440 minutes, to register 3229.
6. If incremental energy will be controlled from a remote master, such as a programmable controller, write 0 to the register.
7. Write 1 to register 8001.
8. Write command code 9021 to register 8000.
Start—To start a new incremental energy interval from a remote master, write command code 6910 to register 8000.
The circuit monitor can perform harmonic magnitude and angle calculations for each metered value and for each residual value. The harmonic magnitude can be formatted as either a percentage of the fundamental
(THD) or as a percentage of the rms values (thd). The harmonic magnitude and angles are stored in a set of registers: 28,672–30,719. During the time that the circuit monitor is refreshing harmonic data, the circuit monitor posts a value of 0 in register 3245. When the set of harmonic registers is updated with new data, the circuit monitor posts a value of 1 in register 3245. The circuit monitor can be configured to hold the values in these registers for up to 60 metering update cycles once the data processing is complete.
The circuit monitor has three operating modes for harmonic data processing: disabled, magnitude only, and magnitude and angles. Because of the extra processing time necessary to perform these calculations, the factory default operating mode is magnitudes only.
To configure the harmonic data processing, write to the registers described
Table A–3: Registers for Harmonic Calculations
Reg No.
3240
3241
3242
3243
3245
Value
0, 1, 2
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
10–60 seconds
10–60 seconds
0,1
Description
Harmonic processing;
0 = disabled
1 = magnitudes only enabled
2 = magnitudes and angles enabled
Harmonic magnitude formatting;
0 = % of fundamental (default)
1 = % of rms
2 = Engineering units (Volts/Amperes)
3 = Volts % Nominal/Amperes
4 = Volts % Fundamental/current in Amperes
Harmonics Refresh Interval
Default = 30 seconds
This register shows the time remaining before the next update (of harmonic data).
This register indicates whether harmonic data processing is complete:
0 = processing incomplete
1 = processing complete
The circuit monitor stores instantaneous metering data in 16-bit single registers. A value held in each register must be an integer between –32,767 and +32,767. Because some values for metered current, voltage, and power readings fall outside this range, the circuit monitor uses multipliers, or scale factors. This enables the circuit monitor to extend the range of metered values that it can record.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
165
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix A—Using the Command Interface
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
The circuit monitor stores these multipliers as scale factors. A scale factor is the multiplier expressed as a power of 10. For example, a multiplier of 10 is represented as a scale factor of 1, since 10
1
=10; a multiplier of 100 is represented as a scale factor of 2, since 10
2
=100.
You can change the default value of 1 to other values such as 10, 100, or
1,000. However, these scale factors are automatically selected when you set up the circuit monitor, either from the display or by using SMS .
If the circuit monitor displays “overflow” for any reading, change the scale factor to bring the reading back into a range that fits in the register. For example, because the register cannot store a number as large as 138,000, a 138 kV system requires a multiplier of 10. 138,000 is converted to 13,800 x 10. The circuit monitor stores this value as 13,800 with a scale factor of 1
(because 10
1
=10).
Scale factors are arranged in scale groups.
You can use the command interface to change scale factors on a group of metered values. However, be aware of these important points if you choose to change scale factors:
Notes:
•
We strongly recommend that you do not change the default scale factors, which are automatically selected by
POWERLOGIC
hardware and software.
•
When using custom software to read circuit monitor data over the communications link, you must account for these scale factors. To correctly read any metered value with a scale factor other than 0, multiply the register value read by the appropriate power of 10.
•
As with any change to basic meter setup, when you change a scale factor, all min/max and peak demand values should be reset.
166
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
APPENDIX B—SPECIFICATIONS
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
CM4250 SPECIFICATIONS
This appendix contains specifications for the circuit monitor and display.
NOTE: Specifications given for the CM4250 are valid at 25 degrees centigrade.
Table B–1: Specifications for CM4250
METERING SPECIFICATIONS
Current Inputs (Each Channel)
Current Range
Nominal Current CT sec
Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)
Voltage Range
Nominal Voltage PT sec
Frequency Range
0–10 A
5 , 1 A
➀
1–690 Line to Line, 400 Line to Neutral
100, 110, 115, 120 V
45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz
Harmonic Response—Phase Voltages and Currents
Frequency 45–67 Hz
Frequency 350–450 Hz
Data Update Rate
Up to 255th Harmonic
Up to 31st Harmonic
Approximately 1-second update of all real-time readings for demand and energy calculations (100 ms update for some real-time readings).
Accuracy
➁
Current (measured)
➂
Phase Amperes and Neutral Amperes
Voltage
Total Power
Real, Reactive, and Apparent Power
True Power Factor
Energy and Demand
±
(0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale) (full scale = 10 A)
±
(0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale) (full scale = 690 V)
0.075% of reading + 0.025% of full scale
±
0.002 from 0.500 leading to 0.500 lagging
ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class, IEC 62053-22 0.2 Class
Frequency
50/60Hz
400 Hz
Time of Day Clock/Calendar (at 25°C)
➃
±
0.01 Hz at 45–67 Hz
±
0.10 Hz at 350–450 Hz
Less than
±
1.5 seconds in 24 hours (1 ms resolution)
METERING INPUT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Current Inputs
Nominal
Metering Over-range
Overcurrent Withstand
Input Impedance
Burden
Analog-to-Digital Converter Resolution
Anti-aliasing Filters
5.0 A rms
400% (20 A maximum)
40 A rms Continuous
100 A rms 10 seconds in 1 hour
500 A rms 1 second in 1 hour
Less than 0.1 Ohm
Less than 0.15 VA
16 bits
50 dB attenuation at 1/2 sample rate
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
167
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
Table B–1: Specifications for CM4250 (continued)
Voltage Inputs
➄
Nominal Full Scale
Metering Over-range
Input Impedance
Measurement overvoltage category
CONTROL POWER INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
AC Control Power
Operating Input Range
Burden, maximum
Frequency Range
Isolation
Ride-through on Power Loss
DC Control Power
Operating Input Range
Burden
Isolation
Ride-through on Power Loss
Overvoltage Category
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature
Meter and Optional Modules
400 Vac Line to Neutral, 690 Line to Line
50%
Greater than 5 MegaOhm
CATIV - up to 2000 m
CATIII - from 2000-3000 m
90–305 Vac
50 VA
45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz
2400 V, 1 minute
0.1 second at 120 Vac
100–300 Vdc
30 W maximum
3400 Vdc, 1 minute
0.1 second at 120 Vdc
II per IEC 1010-1, second edition
Remote Display
Storage Temperature
Meter and Optional Modules
Remote Display
Humidity Rating
Pollution Degree
Altitude Range
Physical Specifications
Weight (approximate, without add-on modules)
Dimensions
REGULATORY/STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
Electromagnetic Interference
Radiated Emissions
Conducted Emissions
Electrostatic Discharge (Air Discharge)
Immunity to Electrical Fast Transient
Immunity to Surge (Impulse Wave)
Voltage dips and interrupts
Conducted immunity
Dielectric Withstand
Immunity to Radiated Fields
168
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
–25° to +70°C maximum
(See information about operating temperature of the circuit monitor in the installation guide.)
VFD model is –20 to +70°C
LCD model is –20 to +60°C
–40 to +85°C (ADD Standard)
VFD model is –40 to +85°C
LCD model is –30 to +80°C
5–95% Relative Humidity (non-condensing) at 40°C
II per IEC 1010-1
0 to 3,000 m (10,000 ft)
4.2 lb (1.90 kg)
See circuit monitor dimensions in the Series 4000 installation manual.
FCC Part 15 Class A/EN550 II Class A
FCC Part 15 Class A/EN550 II Class A
IEC 1000-4-2 level 3
IEC 1000-4-4 level 3
IEC 1000-4-5 level 4 (up to 6 kv) on voltage inputs
IEC 1000-4-11
IEC 1000-4-6
UL 508, CSA C22.2-14-M1987, EN 61010
IEC 61000-4-3
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
Table B–1: Specifications for CM4250 (continued)
Accuracy
IEC 61000-4-8
Product Standards
USA
Canada
Europe
Listings
KYZ SPECIFICATIONS
ANSI C12.20, IEC 687 Class 0.2, IEC62053-22 Class 0.2
Magnetic fields 30 A/m
UL 508, IEC61000-4-7
CSA C22.2-2-4-M1987
CE per low voltage directive EN 61010, IEC61000-4-30
CUL and UL Listed 18X5 Ind Cont. Eq.
Load voltage
Load current
ON resistance
Leakage current
Turn ON/OFF time
240 Vac, 300 Vdc maximum
100 mA maximum at 25°C
➅
35 ohms maximum
0.03
μ
A (typical)
3 ms
Input or output isolation 3750 V rms
➀
All values are in rms unless otherwise noted.
➁
Based on 1-second update rate. Does not apply to 100ms readings.
➂
Any CT secondary currents less than 5 mA fundamental are reported as zero.
➃
If higher precision is required, a GPS option is available. See “Digital Inputs” in the reference manual for more information.
➄
Any voltage input to the meter that is below 1.0 V fundamental is reported as zero.
➅
Derate load current 0.56 mA/
°C
above 25
°C
.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
169
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
CM4000T SPECIFICATIONS
Table B–2: Specifications for CM4000T
METERING SPECIFICATIONS
Current Inputs (Each Channel)
Current Range
Nominal Current
Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)
Voltage Range
Nominal Voltage (typical)
Impulsive Voltage
Impulse Sampling Frequency
Impulse Range
0–10 A ac
5 A ac
0–600 Vac Line to Line, 347 Line to Neutral
120 Vac
Impulse Resolution
Impulse Accuracy
Frequency Range
Harmonic Response—Phase Voltages and Currents
Frequency 45–67 Hz
Frequency 350–450 Hz
Data Update Rate
15 MHz, 5 MHz per channel (3 voltage channels)
0 to 5,000 volts (peak) L-N
0 to 10,000 volts (peak) L-L
12 bits, 2.0 volts
±5% of reading
45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz
255th Harmonic
31st Harmonic
Approximately 1-second update of all real-time readings for demand and energy calculations (100 ms update for some real-time readings).
Accuracy
➀
Current (measured)
➁
• Phase Amperes and Neutral Amperes
Voltage
Power
Current = 0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale
0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale
• Real, Reactive, and Apparent Power
True Power Factor
0.075% of reading + 0.025% of full scale
±
0.002 from 0.500 leading to 0.500 lagging
ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class, IEC 687 0.2 Class Energy and Demand
Frequency
• 50/60Hz
• 400 Hz
Time of Day Clock/Calendar (at 25°C)
±
0.01 Hz at 45–67 Hz
±
0.10 Hz at 350–450 Hz
Less than
±
1.5 seconds in 24 hours (1 ms resolution)
METERING INPUT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Current Inputs
Nominal
Metering Over-range
Overcurrent Withstand
5.0 A rms
100% (10 A maximum)
15 A rms Continuous
50 A rms 10 seconds in 1 hour
500 A rms 1 second in 1 hour
Less than 0.1 Ohm
Less than 0.15 VA
Input Impedance
Burden
Voltage Inputs
➃
Nominal Full Scale
Metering Over-range
Input Impedance
347 Vac Line to Neutral, 600 Line to Line
50%
Greater than 2 Megohm (L-L), 1 Megohm (L-N)
170
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table B–2: Specifications for CM4000T (continued)
CONTROL POWER INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
120/240 Vac Nominal
Operating Input Range
Burden, maximum
Frequency Range
Isolation
Ride-through on Power Loss
125/250 Vdc Nominal
Operating Input Range
Burden
Isolation
Ride-through on Power Loss
Mains Supply Voltage Fluctuations
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature
Meter and Optional Modules
Remote Display
Storage Temperature
Meter and Optional Modules
Remote Display
Humidity Rating
Pollution Degree
Installation Category
Altitude Range
Physical Specifications
Weight (approximate, without add-on modules)
Dimensions
REGULATORY/STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
Electromagnetic Interference
Radiated Emissions
Conducted Emissions
Electrostatic Discharge (Air Discharge)
Immunity to Electrical Fast Transient
Immunity to Surge (Impulse Wave)
Dielectric Withstand
Immunity to Radiated Fields
Accuracy
Safety
USA
Canada
Europe
Listings
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
90–305 Vac
50 VA
45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz
2300 V, 1 minute
0.1 second at 120 Vac
100–300 Vdc
30 W maximum
3250 Vdc, 1 minute
0.1 second at 120 Vdc not to exceed
±
10%
–25° to +65°C maximum
(See information about operating temperature in the
PowerLogic Circuit
Monitor Installation Manual.
)
VFD model is –20 to +70°C
LCD model is –20 to +60°C
–40 to +85°C
VFD model is –40 to +85°C
LCD model is –30 to +80°C
5–95% Relative Humidity (non-condensing) at 40°C
UL840, IEC 1010-1 (Class 2)
UL508, IEC 1010-1 (Class 2)
0 to 2,000 m (6,561.68 ft)
4.2 lb (1.90 kg)
See the
PowerLogic Circuit Monitor Installation Manual.
.
FCC Part 15 Class A/CE heavy industrial
FCC Part 15 Class A/CE heavy industrial
IEC pub 1,000-4-2 level 3
IEC pub 1,000-4-4 level 3
IEC pub 1,000-4-5 level 4
UL 508, CSA C22.2-14-M1987, EN 61010
IEC pub 61000-6-2
ANSI C12.20 and IEC 687 Class 0.2
UL 508
CSA C22.2-2-4-M1987
CE per low voltage directive EN 61010, IEC61000-4-15 cUL and UL Listed 18X5 Ind Cont. Eq.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
171
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
Table B–2: Specifications for CM4000T (continued)
KYZ SPECIFICATIONS
Load voltage
Load current
ON resistance
Leakage current
Turn ON/OFF time
240 Vac, 300 Vdc maximum
96 mA maximum
50 ohms maximum
0.03
μ
A (typical)
3 ms
Input or output isolation 3750 V rms
➀
Based on 1-second update rate. Does not apply to 100ms readings.
➁
Any CT secondary currents less than 5 mA are reported as zero.
➂
If higher precision is required, see “Digital Inputs” in the reference manual for more information.
➃
Any voltage input to the meter that is below 1.0 V is reported as zero.
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
172
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
CM4000 SPECIFICATIONS
Table B–3: Specifications for CM4000
METERING SPECIFICATIONS
Current Inputs (Each Channel)
Current Range
Nominal Current
Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)
Voltage Range
Nominal Voltage (typical)
Frequency Range
0–10 A ac
5 A ac
0–600 Vac Line to Line, 347 Line to Neutral
120 Vac
45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz
Harmonic Response—Phase Voltages and Currents
Frequency 45–67 Hz
Frequency 350–450 Hz
Data Update Rate
255th Harmonic
31st Harmonic
Approximately 1-second update of all real-time readings for demand and energy calculations (100 ms update for some real-time readings).
Accuracy
➀
Current (measured)
➁
Phase Amperes and Neutral Amperes
Voltage
±
(0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale)
±
(0.04% of reading + 0.025% full scale)
Power
Real, Reactive, and Apparent Power
True Power Factor
Energy and Demand
0.075% of reading + 0.025% of full scale
±
0.002 from 0.500 leading to 0.500 lagging
ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class, IEC 687 0.2 Class
Frequency
50/60Hz
400 Hz
Time of Day Clock/Calendar (at 25°C)
➂
±
0.01 Hz at 45–67 Hz
±
0.10 Hz at 350–450 Hz
Less than
±
1.5 seconds in 24 hours (1 ms resolution)
METERING INPUT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Current Inputs
Nominal
Metering Over-range
Overcurrent Withstand
5.0 A rms
100% (10 A maximum)
15 A rms Continuous
50 A rms 10 seconds in 1 hour
500 A rms 1 second in 1 hour
Less than 0.1 Ohm
Less than 0.15 VA
Input Impedance
Burden
Voltage Inputs
➃
Nominal Full Scale
Metering Over-range
Input Impedance
347 Vac Line to Neutral, 600 Line to Line
50%
Greater than 2 MegaOhm
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
173
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
Table B–3: Specifications for CM4000 (continued)
CONTROL POWER INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
120/240 Vac Nominal
Operating Input Range
Burden, maximum
Frequency Range
Isolation
Ride-through on Power Loss
125/250 Vdc Nominal
Operating Input Range
Burden
Isolation
Ride-through on Power Loss
Mains Supply Voltage Fluctuations
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature
Meter and Optional Modules
Remote Display
Storage Temperature
Meter and Optional Modules
Remote Display
Humidity Rating
Pollution Degree
Installation Category
Altitude Range
Physical Specifications
Weight (approximate, without add-on modules)
Dimensions
REGULATORY/STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
Electromagnetic Interference
Radiated Emissions
Conducted Emissions
Electrostatic Discharge (Air Discharge)
Immunity to Electrical Fast Transient
Immunity to Surge (Impulse Wave)
Voltage dips and interrupts
Conducted immunity
Dielectric Withstand
Immunity to Radiated Fields
Accuracy
Product Standards
USA
Canada
Europe
Listings
90–305 Vac
50 VA
45–67 Hz, 350–450 Hz
2300 V, 1 minute
0.1 second at 120 Vac
100–300 Vdc
30 W maximum
3250 Vdc, 1 minute
0.1 second at 120 Vdc not to exceed
±
10%
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
–25° to +70°C maximum
(See information about operating temperature in the PowerLogic Circuit Monitor
Installation Manual.)
VFD model is –20 to +70°C
LCD model is –20 to +60°C
–40 to +85°C
VFD model is –40 to +85°C
LCD model is –30 to +80°C
5–95% Relative Humidity (non-condensing) at 40°C
II per IEC 1010-1
II per IEC 1010-1
0 to 3,048 m (10,000 ft)
4.2 lb (1.90 kg)
See the PowerLogic Circuit Monitor Installation Manual..
FCC Part 15 Class A/EN550 II Class A
FCC Part 15 Class A/EN550 II Class A
IEC 1000-4-2 level 3
IEC 1000-4-4 level 3
IEC 1000-4-5 level 4
IEC 1000-4-11
IEC 1000-4-6
UL 508, CSA C22.2-14-M1987, EN 61010
IEC 61000-4-3
ANSI C12.20 and IEC 687 Class 0.2
UL 508
CSA C22.2-2-4-M1987
CE per low voltage directive EN 61010 cUL and UL Listed 18X5 Ind Cont. Eq.
174
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
Table B–3: Specifications for CM4000 (continued)
KYZ SPECIFICATIONS
Load voltage
Load current
ON resistance
Leakage current
240 Vac, 300 Vdc maximum
100 mA maximum at 25°C
➄
35 ohms maximum
0.03
μ
A (typical)
3 ms Turn ON/OFF time
Input or output isolation
➀
Based on 1-second update rate. Does not apply to 100ms readings.
3750 V rms
➁
Any CT secondary currents less than 5 mA are reported as zero.
➂
If higher precision is required, see “Digital Inputs” in the reference manual for more information.
➃
Any voltage input to the meter that is below 1.0 V is reported as zero.
➄
Derate load current 0.56 mA/
°C
above 25
°C
.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
175
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix B—Specifications
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
176
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
APPENDIX C—ABBREVIATED REGISTER LISTING
ABOUT REGISTERS
For registers defined in bits, the rightmost bit is referred to as bit 00. Figure
C–1 shows how bits are organized in a register.
Figure C–1: Bits in a register
High Byte Low Byte
0
15
0
14
0 0 0 0
13 12 11 10
1 0
09 08
0 0
07 06
1
05
0
04
0 1
03 02
0 0
01 00 Bit No.
The circuit monitor registers can be used with
MODBUS
or
JBUS
protocols.
Although the
MODBUS
protocol uses a zero-based register addressing convention and
JBUS
protocol uses a one-based register addressing convention, the circuit monitor automatically compensates for the MODBUS offset of one. Regard all registers as holding registers where a 30,000 or
40,000 offset can be used. For example, Current Phase A will reside in register 31,000 or 41,000 instead of 1,000.
Table C–3 on page 180 contains the following ranges of registers:
•
1000 – 1067—100 ms data
•
1080 – 1299—Real Time 1 second data
•
1300 – 1499—Real Time Minimums
•
1500 – 1794—Real Time Maximums
•
1700 – 1794—Energy Readings
•
2150 – 2193—Demand Readings
•
3000 – 3999—System Configurations
For a more complete register listing, visit the www.powerlogic.com web site.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
177
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
HOW POWER FACTOR IS STORED IN
THE REGISTER
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Each power factor value occupies one register. Power factor values are
stored using signed magnitude notation (see Figure C–2 below). Bit number
15, the sign bit, indicates leading/lagging. A positive value (bit 15=0) always indicates leading. A negative value (bit 15=1) always indicates lagging. Bits
0–9 store a value in the range 0–1,000 decimal. For example the circuit monitor would return a leading power factor of 0.5 as 500. Divide by 1,000 to get a power factor in the range 0 to 1.000.
Figure C–2: Power factor register format
15 14 13 12 11 10
0 0 0 0 0
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sign Bit
0=Leading
1=Lagging
Unused Bits
Set to 0
Power Factor in the range 100-1000 (thousandths)
HOW DATE AND TIME ARE STORED IN
REGISTERS
When the power factor is lagging, the circuit monitor returns a high negative value—for example, -31,794. This happens because bit 15=1 (for example, the binary equivalent of -31,794 is 1000001111001110). To get a value in the range 0 to 1,000, you need to mask bit 15. You do this by adding 32,768 to the value. An example will help clarify.
Assume that you read a power factor value of -31,794. Convert this to a power factor in the range 0 to 1.000, as follows:
-31,794 + 32,768 = 974
974/1,000 = .974 lagging power factor
The date and time are stored in a four-register compressed format. Each of the four registers, such as registers 1810 to 1813, contain a high and low
byte value to represent the date and time in hexadecimal. Table C–1 lists
the register and the portion of the date or time it represents.
Table C–1: Date and Time Format
Register
Register 1
Register 2
Register 3
Register 4
Hi Byte
Month (1-12)
Year (0-199)
Minute (0-59)
Milliseconds
Lo Byte
Day (1-31)
Hour (0-23)
Second (0-59)
178
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
For example, if the date was 01/25/00 at 11:06:59.122, the Hex value would be 0119, 640B, 063B, 007A. Breaking it down into bytes we have the following:
Table C–2: Date and Time Byte Example
Hexadecimal Value
0119
640B
063B
007A
Hi Byte
01 = month
64 = year
06 = minute
007A = milliseconds
Lo Byte
19 = day
0B = hour
3B = seconds
HOW ENERGY VALUES ARE STORED IN
REGISTERS
Energy values are stored in a four-register format. Each of the four registers can have a value ranging from 0 to 9,999. A specific multiplier acts on each individual register and that value is added together for the 4 registers for the total value of the energy topic.
Register 4
0 - 9,999
Register 3
0 - 9,999
Register 2
0 - 9,999
Register 1
0 - 9,999
Energy Value = (Register 4 X 1,000,000,000,000) +
(Register 3 X 100,000,000) +
(Register 2 X 10,000) +
(Register 1)
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
179
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
ABBREVIATED REGISTER LISTING
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3 contains an abbreviated register list for the circuit monitor.
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List
Type Reg Name Size
100 ms Metering—Current
1000 Current, Phase A
1001 Current, Phase B
1002 Current, Phase C
1
1
1
1003 Current, Neutral 1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
1004 Current, Ground 1
1005
Current, 3-Phase
Average
1
1006
Current,
Apparent RMS
100 ms Metering—Voltage
1
1020 Voltage, A-B 1
1021 Voltage, B-C
1022 Voltage, C-A
1023
Voltage, L-L
Average
1024 Voltage, A-N 1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV Scale
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
C
A
A
A
A
B
A
D
D
D
D
D
Units
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
1025 Voltage, B-N
1026 Voltage, C-N
1027 Voltage, N-G
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
D
D
E
D
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Range Notes
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
RMS
RMS
RMS
RMS
4-wire system only
RMS
4-wire system only
Calculated mean of Phases A, B & C
Peak instantaneous current of Phase
A, B or C divided by
√
2
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between A & B
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between B & C
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between C & A
Fundamental RMS 3 Phase Average
L-L Voltage
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between A & N
4-wire system only
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between B & N
4-wire system only
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between C & N
4-wire system only
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between N & G
4-wire system with 4 element metering only
Fundamental RMS 3-Phase Average
L-N Voltage
4-wire system only
1028
Voltage, L-N
Average
1
100 ms Metering—Power
1040
1041
1042
Real Power,
Phase A
Real Power,
Phase B
Real Power,
Phase C
1
1
1
1043 Real Power, Total 1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
Integer RO N
1044
1045
Reactive Power,
Phase A
Reactive Power,
Phase B
1
1
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
N
N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
F
F
F
F
F
F kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Real Power (PA)
4-wire system only
Real Power (PB)
4-wire system only
Real Power (PC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = PA+PB+PC
3 wire system = 3-Phase real power
Reactive Power (QA)
4-wire system only
Reactive Power (QB)
4-wire system only
180
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
Name
Reactive Power,
Phase C
Reactive Power,
Total
Apparent Power,
Phase A
Apparent Power,
Phase B
Apparent Power,
Phase C
Size
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
1051
Apparent Power,
Total
1
100 ms Metering—Power Factor
Integer
1060
True Power
Factor, Phase A
1 Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1061
True Power
Factor, Phase B
1062
True Power
Factor, Phase C
1063
True Power
Factor, Total
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
Scale
F
F
F
F
F
F xx xx xx xx
1064
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase A
1065
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase B
1066
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase C
1067
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Total
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N xx xx xx xx
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVA/Scale kVA/Scale kVA/Scale kVA/Scale
Range
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
Notes
Reactive Power (QC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = QA+QB+QC
3 wire system = 3-Phase real power
Apparent Power (SA)
4-wire system only
Apparent Power (SB)
4-wire system only
Apparent Power (SC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = SA+SB+SC
3 wire system = 3-Phase real power
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
➀
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
Reported value is mapped from 0-
2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
100 ms Metering—Frequency
1080 Frequency 1 Integer RO N xx
0.01Hz
0.10Hz
(50/60Hz)
4,500 – 6,700
(400Hz)
3,500 – 4,500
(-32,768 if N/A)
Frequency of circuits being monitored.
If the frequency is out of range, the register will be -32,768. Value is measured only if configured in register
3239.
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
181
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Type Access Reg Name
1 s Metering—Current
1100 Current, Phase A
1101 Current, Phase B
1102 Current, Phase C
Size
1
1
1
1103 Current, Neutral 1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
N
N
N
N
1 Integer RO N
Scale
1104 Current, Ground
1105
1106
1107
1108
Current, 3-Phase
Average
Current,
Apparent RMS
Current,
Unbalance,
Phase A
Current,
Unbalance,
Phase B
1109
1110
Current,
Unbalance,
Phase C
Current,
Unbalance, Max
1 s Metering—Voltage
1120 Voltage, A-B
1121 Voltage, B-C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
B
C xx xx xx xx
Units
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
1122 Voltage, C-A
1123
Voltage, L-L
Average
1124 Voltage, A-N
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
D
D
D
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
1125 Voltage, B-N
1126 Voltage, C-N
1127 Voltage, N-G
1128
1129
1130
1131
Voltage, L-N
Average
Voltage,
Unbalance, A-B
Voltage,
Unbalance, B-C
Voltage,
Unbalance, C-A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
D
D
E xx xx
D xx
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Range Notes
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
RMS
RMS
RMS
RMS
4-wire system only
RMS
4-wire system only
Calculated mean of Phases A, B & C
Peak instantaneous current of Phase
A, B or C divided by
√
2
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000 Percent Unbalance, Worst
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between A & B
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between B & C
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between C & A
Fundamental RMS 3 Phase Average
L-L Voltage
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between A & N
4-wire system only
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between B & N
4-wire system only
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between C & N
4-wire system only
Fundamental RMS Voltage measured between N & G
4-wire system with 4 element metering only
Fundamental RMS 3-Phase Average
L-N Voltage
Percent Voltage Unbalance,
Phase A-B
Percent Voltage Unbalance,
Phase B-C
Percent Voltage Unbalance,
Phase C-A
182
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Size Type Access Reg
1132
Name
Voltage,
Unbalance, Max
L-L
1133
Voltage,
Unbalance, A-N
1
1
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
NV
N
N
1134
Voltage,
Unbalance, B-N
1 Integer RO N
Scale
xx xx xx
1135
Voltage,
Unbalance, C-N
1136
Voltage,
Unbalance, Max
L-N
1 s Metering—Power
1140
1141
1142
Real Power,
Phase A
Real Power,
Phase B
Real Power,
Phase C
1143 Real Power, Total
1144
1145
1146
1147
Reactive Power,
Phase A
Reactive Power,
Phase B
Reactive Power,
Phase C
Reactive Power,
Total
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1148
1149
1150
1151
Apparent Power,
Phase A
Apparent Power,
Phase B
Apparent Power,
Phase C
Apparent Power,
Total
1
1
1
1
1 s Metering—Power Factor
1160
True Power
Factor, Phase A
1
1161
True Power
Factor, Phase B
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1162
True Power
Factor, Phase C
1 Integer RO N
1163
True Power
Factor, Total
1 Integer RO N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
N
N
N
N
N
N
N xx xx
F
F xx xx xx xx
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.001
0.001
Range Notes
0 – 1,000 Percent Voltage Unbalance, Worst L-L
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
Percent Voltage Unbalance,
Phase A-N
4-wire system only
Percent Voltage Unbalance,
Phase B-N
4-wire system only
Percent Voltage Unbalance,
Phase C-N
4-wire system only
Percent Voltage Unbalance,
Worst L-N
4-wire system only kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVA/Scale kVA/Scale kVA/Scale kVA/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
Real Power (PA)
4-wire system only
Real Power (PB)
4-wire system only
Real Power (PC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = PA+PB+PC
3-wire system = 3-Phase real power
Reactive Power (QA)
4-wire system only
Reactive Power (QB)
4-wire system only
Reactive Power (QC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = QA+QB+QC
3 wire system = 3-Phase reactive power
Apparent Power (SA)
4-wire system only
Apparent Power (SB)
4-wire system only
Apparent Power (SC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = SA+SB+SC
3-wire system = 3-Phase apparent power
0.001
0.001
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
➀
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
183
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type Access NV Scale
1164
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase A
1 Integer RO N xx
1165
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase B
1 Integer RO N xx
1166
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase C
1 Integer RO N xx
1167
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Total
1 Integer RO N xx
1168
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase A
1169
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase B
1170
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase C
1171
Displacement
Power Factor,
Total
1172
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase A
1 Integer RO
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
N xx
N
N
N
N xx xx xx xx
1173
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase B
1 Integer RO N xx
1174
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase C
1 Integer RO N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
184
xx
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Units
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
Range
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
➀
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
Notes
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
Reported value is mapped from 0-
2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type Access NV Scale
1175
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Total
1 Integer
1 s Metering—Frequency and Temperature
RO N xx
1180 Frequency 1
1181 Temperature 1
1 s Metering—Analog Inputs
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 1
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 2
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 3
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 4
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 5
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 6
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 7
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 8
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 9
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 10
Power Quality—THD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1200
THD/thd Current,
Phase A
1 Integer RO N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
0.01Hz
0.10Hz
0.1
°
C
(50/60Hz)
4,500 – 6,700
(400Hz)
3,500 – 4,500
(-32,768 if N/A)
-1,000 – 1,000
Frequency of circuits being monitored.
If the frequency is out of range, the register will be -32,768.
Internal unit temperature
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
Present value of user-selected auxiliary analog input.
This value will be included in Min/Max determinations.
xx
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
0.001
0.10%
Range
0 – 2,000
Notes
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power. Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
0 – 32,767
Total Harmonic Distortion, Phase A
Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
185
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Type Access Reg Name
1201
THD/thd Current,
Phase B
Size
1 Integer RO
NV
N
Scale
xx
1202
THD/thd Current,
Phase C
1 Integer RO N xx
1203
THD/thd Current,
Phase N
1 Integer RO N xx
1204
THD/thd Current,
Ground
1207
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase A-N
1208
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase B-N
1209
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase C-N
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
1210
1225
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase N-G
1211
1212
1213
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase A-B
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase B-C
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase C-A
1215
1216
THD/thd Voltage,
3-Phase Average
L-N
THD/thd Voltage,
3-Phase Average
L-L
Transformer Heating
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
K-Factor,
Current, Phase A
K-Factor,
Current, Phase B
K-Factor,
Current, Phase C
Crest Factor,
Current, Phase A
Crest Factor,
Current, Phase B
Crest Factor,
Current, Phase C
Crest Factor,
Current, Neutral
Crest Factor,
Voltage, A-N/A-B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Units
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.01
0.01
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Range
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
Notes
Total Harmonic Distortion, Phase B
Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Total Harmonic Distortion, Phase C
Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Total Harmonic Distortion, Phase N
Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Total Harmonic Distortion, Ground
Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
Updated with spectral components.
Updated with spectral components.
Updated with spectral components.
Transformer Crest Factor
0 – 10,000 Transformer Crest Factor
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 10,000
Transformer Crest Factor
Transformer Crest Factor
4-wire system only
Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
186
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Type Access Reg Name
1226
Crest Factor,
Voltage, B-N/B-C
Size
1 Integer RO
NV
N
1227
Crest Factor,
Voltage, C-N/C-A
1 Integer RO N
Fundamental Magnitudes and Angles—Current
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase A
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase A
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase B
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase B
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase C
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase C
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Neutral
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Neutral
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Ground
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
1239
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Ground
1 Integer RO
Fundamental Magnitudes and Angles—Voltage
1244
1245
1246
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
A-N/A-B
Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, A-N/A-B
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
B-N/B-C
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx xx
A xx
A xx
A xx
B xx
C xx
D xx
D
Units
0.01
0.01
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
Range
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
Notes
Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Referenced to A-N
4-wire system only
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Referenced to A-N
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
Referenced to A-N (4-wire) or A-B (3wire)
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
187
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1247
1248
1249
Name
Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, B-N/B-C
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
C-N/C-A
Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, C-N/C-A
1250
1251
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
N-G
Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, N-G
Fundamental Power
Size
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase A
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase B
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase C
Fundamental
Real Power, Total
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase A
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase B
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
1261
1262
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase C
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Total
1
1
Integer
Integer
Distortion Power and Power Factor
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
Distortion Power,
Phase A
Distortion Power,
Phase B
Distortion Power,
Phase C
Distortion Power,
Total
Distortion Power
Factor, Phase A
Distortion Power
Factor, Phase B
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
N
N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx
D xx
E xx
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F xx xx
F
F
F
F
Units
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
° kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale
0.10%
0.10%
Range
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
0 – 3,599
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Notes
Referenced to A-N (4-wire) or A-B (3wire)
Referenced to A-N (4-wire) or A-B (3wire)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Referenced to A-N
4-wire system only kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
4-wire system only
4-wire system only
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
4-wire system only
188
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1270
Name
Distortion Power
Factor, Phase C
Size
1
1271
Distortion Power
Factor, Total
1
Harmonic Current and Voltage
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
Harmonic
Current, Phase A
Harmonic
Current, Phase B
Harmonic
Current, Phase C
Harmonic
Current, Neutral
Harmonic
Voltage, A-N/A-B
Harmonic
Voltage, B-N/B-C
Harmonic
Voltage, C-N/C-A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1281
Total Demand
Distortion
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Scale
xx xx xx
A
A
A
B
D
D
D
1282
Harmonic Power
Flow
1 Bitmap RO N xx
Units
0.10%
0.10%
Range
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
Notes
4-wire system only
Amperes/Scale 0 – 32,767
Amperes/Scale 0 – 32,767
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
0.1% xxxxxxx
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 1,000
0x0000 – 0x0F0F
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
Calculated based on Peak Current
Demand Over Last Year entered by user in register 3233
Describes harmonic power flow per phase and total
0 = into load, 1 = out of load
Bit 00 = kW Phase A
Bit 01 = kW Phase B
Bit 02 = kW Phase C
Bit 03 = kW Total
Bit 04 = reserved
Bit 05 = reserved
Bit 06 = reserved
Bit 07 = reserved
Bit 08 = kVAr Phase A
Bit 09 = kVAr Phase B
Bit 10 = kVAr Phase C
Bit 11 = kVAr Total
Bit 12 = reserved
Bit 13 = reserved
Bit 14 = reserved
Bit 15 = reserved
Sequence Components
1284
1285
1286
1287
Current, Positive
Sequence,
Magnitude
Current, Positive
Sequence,
Angle
Current,
Negative
Sequence,
Magnitude
Current,
Negative
Sequence,
Angle
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
1288
Current, Zero
Sequence,
Magnitude
1 Integer RO N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
A xx
A xx
A
Amperes/Scale
0.1
Amperes/Scale
0.1
Amperes/Scale
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
189
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
Name
Current, Zero
Sequence,
Angle
Voltage, Positive
Sequence,
Magnitude
Voltage, Positive
Sequence,
Angle
Voltage,
Negative
Sequence,
Magnitude
Voltage,
Negative
Sequence,
Angle
Voltage, Zero
Sequence,
Magnitude
Voltage, Zero
Sequence,
Angle
Current,
Sequence,
Unbalance
Voltage,
Sequence,
Unbalance
1298
1299
Current,
Sequence
Unbalance
Factor
Voltage,
Sequence
Unbalance
Factor
Minimum—Current
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
Minimum
Current, Phase A
Minimum
Current, Phase B
Minimum
Current, Phase C
Minimum
Current, Neutral
Minimum
Current, Ground
Minimum
Current, 3-Phase
Average
Minimum
Current,
Apparent RMS
Minimum Current
Unbalance,
Phase A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx
D xx
D xx
D xx xx xx xx xx
A
B
A
A
C
A
A xx
Units
0.1
Volts/Scale
0.1
Volts/Scale
0.1
Volts/Scale
0.1
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
0.10%
Range
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
Notes
Negative Sequence / Positive
Sequence
Negative Sequence / Positive
Sequence
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
RMS
RMS
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
RMS
RMS
4-wire system only
Minimum calculated RMS ground current
Minimum calculated mean of Phases
A, B & C
0 – 32,767
Minimum peak instantaneous current of Phase A, B or C divided by
√
2
0 – 1,000
190
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Type Access Reg
1308
Name
Minimum Current
Unbalance,
Phase B
1309
1310
Minimum Current
Unbalance,
Phase C
Minimum Current
Unbalance, Max
Minimum—Voltage
1320
1321
1322
1323
Minimum
Voltage, A-B
Minimum
Voltage, B-C
Minimum
Voltage, C-A
Minimum
Voltage, L-L
Average
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1324
Minimum
Voltage, A-N
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1325
Minimum
Voltage, B-N
1 Integer RO Y
1326
Minimum
Voltage, C-N
1 Integer RO Y
Scale
xx xx xx
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
1327
Minimum
Voltage, N-G
1 Integer RO Y
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
Minimum
Voltage, L-N
Average
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance, A-B
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance, B-C
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance, C-A
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance, Max
L-L
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance, A-N
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance, B-N
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance, C-N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1336
Minimum Voltage
Unbalance,
Max L-N
1 Integer RO Y
Minimum—Power
1340
Minimum Real
Power, Phase A
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
E xx
F
D xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10% kW/Scale
Range
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
Notes
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum fundamental RMS Voltage between A & B
Minimum fundamental RMS Voltage between B & C
Minimum fundamental RMS Voltage between C & A
Minimum fundamental RMS Average
L-L Voltage
Minimum fundamental RMS Voltage between A & N
4-wire system only
Minimum fundamental RMS Voltage between B & N
4-wire system only
Minimum fundamental RMS Voltage between C & N
4-wire system only
Minimum fundamental RMS Voltage between N & G
4-wire system with 4-element metering only
Minimum fundamental RMS L-N
Voltage
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
Minimum percent Voltage Unbalance,
Worst L-L
Depends on absolute value
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum percent Voltage Unbalance,
Worst L-N
Depends on absolute value
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Real Power (PA)
4-wire system only
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
191
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
Name
Minimum Real
Power, Phase B
Minimum Real
Power, Phase C
Minimum Real
Power, Total
Minimum
Reactive Power,
Phase A
Minimum
Reactive Power,
Phase B
Minimum
Reactive Power,
Phase C
Minimum
Reactive Power,
Total
Minimum
Apparent Power,
Phase A
Minimum
Apparent Power,
Phase B
1350
1351
Minimum
Apparent Power,
Phase C
Minimum
Apparent Power,
Total
Minimum—Power Factor
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1360
1361
1362
1363
Minimum True
Power Factor,
Phase A
Minimum True
Power Factor,
Phase B
Minimum True
Power Factor,
Phase C
Minimum True
Power Factor,
Total
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Scale
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F xx xx xx xx
1364
Minimum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase A
1 Integer RO Y xx
1365
Minimum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase B
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
xx
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Units
kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVA/Scale kVA /Scale kVA /Scale kVA /Scale
Range
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
Notes
Minimum Real Power (PB)
4-wire system only
Minimum Real Power (PC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = PA+PB+PC
3 wire system = 3-Phase real power
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Reactive Power (QA)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Reactive Power (QB)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Reactive Power (QC)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
4-wire system = QA+QB+QC
3-wire system = 3-Phase reactive power
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Apparent Power (SA)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Apparent Power (SB)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Apparent Power (SC)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
4-wire system = SA+SB+SC
3-wire system = 3-Phase apparent power
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
1,000
-100 to 100
➀
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
192
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type Access NV Scale
1366
Minimum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase C
1 Integer RO Y xx
1367
Minimum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Total
1368
1369
1370
1371
Minimum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase A
Minimum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase B
Minimum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase C
Minimum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Total
1372
Minimum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase A
1373
Minimum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase B
1374
Minimum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
1375
Minimum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Total
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
xx
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
Range
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
Notes
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
Reported value is mapped from 0-
2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
1,000
-100 to 100
➀
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power. Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
193
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type
Minimum—Frequency and Temperature
Access NV Scale
1380
Minimum
Frequency
1 Integer RO Y
1381
Minimum
Temperature
Minimum—Analog Inputs
1
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 1
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 2
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 3
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 4
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 5
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 6
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 7
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 8
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1399
Minimum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 10
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Units
0.01Hz
0.10Hz
0.1
°
C
Range Notes
(50/60Hz)
4,500 – 6,700
(400Hz)
3,500 – 4,500
(-32,768 if N/A)
-1,000 – 1,000
Minimum frequency of circuits being monitored. If the frequency is out of range, the register will be -32,768.
Minimum internal unit temperature
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
194
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name
Minimum—THD
1400
1401
1402
Minimum
THD/thd Current,
Phase A
Minimum
THD/thd Current,
Phase B
Minimum
THD/thd Current,
Phase C
Size
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
1403
Minimum
THD/thd Current,
Phase N
1 Integer RO Y
1404
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1415
1416
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
3-Phase Average
L-L
1
Minimum—Transformer Heating
Integer
1418
1419
1420
Minimum
THD/thd Current,
Ground
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase A-N
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase B-N
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase C-N
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase N-G
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase A-B
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase B-C
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase C-A
Minimum
THD/thd Voltage,
3-Phase Average
L-N
Minimum Current
K-Factor,
Phase A
Minimum Current
K-Factor,
Phase B
Minimum Current
K-Factor,
Phase C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10
0.10
0.10
Range Notes
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase A Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase B Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase C Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase N Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Ground Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 32,767
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 32,767
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
0 – 32,767
Minimum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
195
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
Name
Minimum Crest
Factor, Current,
Phase A
Minimum Crest
Factor, Current,
Phase B
Minimum Crest
Factor, Current,
Phase C
Minimum Crest
Factor, Current,
Neutral
Minimum Crest
Factor,
Voltage A-N/A-B
Size
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1426
1427
Minimum Crest
Factor,
Voltage B-N/B-C
Minimum Crest
Factor,
Voltage C-N/C-A
1
1
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
Y
Y
Minimum—Fundamental Magnitudes and Angles—Current
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
Minimum Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase A
Minimum Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase A
Minimum Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase B
Minimum Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase B
Minimum Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase C
Minimum Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase C
Minimum Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Neutral
Minimum Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Neutral
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1438
Minimum Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Ground
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
A xx
A xx
A xx
B xx
C
Units
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
Range
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
Notes
Minimum Transformer Crest Factor
0 – 10,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
Minimum Transformer Crest Factor
4-wire system only
Minimum Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
Minimum Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Minimum Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
Minimum Transformer Crest Factor
Minimum Transformer Crest Factor
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N
4-wire system only
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
196
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type Access NV
1439
Minimum Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Ground
1 Integer RO Y
Minimum—Fundamental Magnitudes and Angles—Voltage
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
Minimum Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
A-N/A-B
Minimum Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, A-N/A-B
Minimum Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
B-N/B-C
Minimum Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, B-N/B-C
Minimum Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
C-N/C-A
Minimum Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, C-N/C-A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1450
1451
Minimum Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
N-G
Minimum Voltage
Fund. Coincident
Angle, N-G
1
1
Minimum—Fundamental Power
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1455\
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
Minimum
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase A
Minimum
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase B
Minimum
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase C
Minimum
Fundamental
Real Power, Total
Minimum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase A
Minimum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase B
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx
D xx
D xx
D xx
E xx
F
F
F
F
F
F
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
° kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale
Range
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Notes
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to itself)
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N (4-wire) or A-B (3wire)
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N (4-wire) or A-B (3wire)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Angle at the time of magnitude minimum
Referenced to A-N
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767 kVAr/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only kVAr/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
197
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1461
Name
Minimum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase C
Size
1
Type
Integer
Access
1462
Minimum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Total
1 Integer
Minimum—Distortion Power and Power Factor
RO
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
Minimum
Distortion Power,
Phase A
Minimum
Distortion Power,
Phase B
Minimum
Distortion Power,
Phase C
Minimum
Distortion Power,
Total
Minimum
Distortion Power
Factor, Phase A
Minimum
Distortion Power
Factor, Phase B
Minimum
Distortion Power
Factor, Phase C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
1471
Minimum
Distortion Power
Factor, Total
1 Integer
Minimum—Harmonic Current and Voltage
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
Minimum
Harmonic
Current, Phase A
Minimum
Harmonic
Current, Phase B
Minimum
Harmonic
Current, Phase C
Minimum
Harmonic
Current, Neutral
Minimum
Harmonic
Voltage, A-N/A-B
Minimum
Harmonic
Voltage, B-N/B-C
Minimum
Harmonic
Voltage, C-N/C-A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1481
Minimum Total
Demand
Distortion
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
F
F
F
F
F
F xx xx xx xx
A
A
A
B
D
D
D xx
Units
kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
0.01%
Range
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 32,767
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 10,000
Notes
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
198
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type
Minimum—Sequence Components
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
Minimum
Voltage, Positive
Sequence, Angle
Minimum
Voltage,
Negative
Sequence,
Magnitude
Minimum
Voltage,
Negative
Sequence, Angle
Minimum
Voltage, Zero
Sequence,
Magnitude
Minimum
Voltage, Zero
Sequence, Angle
Minimum
Current,
Sequence,
Unbalance
Minimum
Voltage,
Sequence,
Unbalance
Minimum
Current,
Sequence
Unbalance
Factor
Minimum
Current, Positive
Sequence,
Magnitude
Minimum
Current, Positive
Sequence, Angle
Minimum
Current,
Negative
Sequence,
Magnitude
Minimum
Current,
Negative
Sequence, Angle
Minimum
Current, Zero
Sequence,
Magnitude
Minimum
Current, Zero
Sequence, Angle
Minimum
Voltage, Positive
Sequence,
Magnitude
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
A xx
A xx
A xx
D xx
D xx
D xx xx xx xx
Units
Amperes/Scale
0.1
Amperes/Scale
0.1
Amperes/Scale
0.1
Volts/Scale
0.1
Volts/Scale
0.1
Volts/Scale
0.1
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Range
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
-1,000 – 1,000
-1,000 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
Notes
Negative Sequence / Positive
Sequence
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
199
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Type Access Reg Name
1499
Minimum
Voltage,
Sequence
Unbalance
Factor
Maximum—Current
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
Maximum
Current, Phase A
Maximum
Current, Phase B
Maximum
Current, Phase C
Maximum
Current, Neutral
Maximum
Current, Ground
Maximum
Current, 3 Phase
Average
Maximum
Current,
Apparent RMS
Maximum
Current
Unbalance,
Phase A
Maximum
Current
Unbalance,
Phase B
Maximum
Current
Unbalance,
Phase C
1510
Maximum
Current
Unbalance, Max
Maximum—Voltage
1520
1521
1522
1523
Maximum
Voltage, A-B
Maximum
Voltage, B-C
Maximum
Voltage, C-A
Maximum
Voltage, L-L
Average
1524
Maximum
Voltage, A-N
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Scale
xx
D
D
A
B
A
A
C
A
A xx xx xx xx
D
D
D
Units
0.10%
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
1525
Maximum
Voltage, B-N
1 Integer RO Y
1526
Maximum
Voltage, C-N
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
D
D
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Range
0 – 1,000
Notes
Negative Sequence / Positive
Sequence
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
RMS
RMS
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
RMS
RMS
4-wire system only
Maximum calculated RMS ground current
Maximum calculated mean of Phases
A, B & C
0 – 32,767
Maximum peak instantaneous current of Phase A, B or C divided by
√
2
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum fundamental RMS Voltage between A & B
Maximum fundamental RMS Voltage between B & C
Maximum fundamental RMS Voltage between C & A
Maximum fundamental RMS Average
L-L Voltage
Maximum fundamental RMS Voltage between A & N
4-wire system only
Maximum fundamental RMS Voltage between B & N
4-wire system only
Maximum fundamental RMS Voltage between C & N
4-wire system only
200
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type Access NV Scale
1527
Maximum
Voltage, N-G
1 Integer RO Y
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
Maximum
Voltage, L-N
Average
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance, A-B
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance, B-C
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance, C-A
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance,
Max L-L
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance, A-N
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance, B-N
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance, C-N
1536
Maximum
Voltage
Unbalance,
Max L-N
Maximum—Power
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
Maximum Real
Power, Phase A
Maximum Real
Power, Phase B
Maximum Real
Power, Phase C
Maximum Real
Power, Total
Maximum
Reactive Power,
Phase A
Maximum
Reactive Power,
Phase B
Maximum
Reactive Power,
Phase C
Maximum
Reactive Power,
Total
Maximum
Apparent Power,
Phase A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
E
D xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Range
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Notes
Maximum fundamental RMS Voltage between N & G
4-wire system with 4-element metering only
Maximum fundamental RMS L-N
Voltage
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
Maximum percent Voltage Unbalance,
Worst L-L
Depends on absolute value
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum percent Voltage Unbalance,
Worst L-N
Depends on absolute value (4-wire system only) kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVAr/Scale kVA /Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
-32,767 – 32,767
Maximum Real Power (PA)
4-wire system only
Maximum Real Power (PB)
4-wire system only
Maximum Real Power (PC)
4-wire system only
4-wire system = PA+PB+PC
3 wire system = 3-Phase real power
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Reactive Power (QA)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Reactive Power (QB)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Reactive Power (QC)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
4-wire system = QA+QB+QC
3 wire system = 3-Phase reactive power
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Apparent Power (SA)
4-wire system only
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
201
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Type Access Reg
1549
Name
Maximum
Apparent Power,
Phase B
Size
1
1550
1551
Maximum
Apparent Power,
Phase C
Maximum
Apparent Power,
Total
Maximum—Power Factor
1
1
1560
1561
1562
1563
Maximum True
Power Factor,
Phase A
Maximum True
Power Factor,
Phase B
Maximum True
Power Factor,
Phase C
Maximum True
Power Factor,
Total
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Scale
F
F
F xx xx xx xx
1564
Maximum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase A
1 Integer RO Y xx
1565
Maximum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase B
1566
Maximum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Phase C
1567
Maximum
Alternate True
Power Factor,
Total
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
1568
1569
Maximum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase A
Maximum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase B
1
1
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
Y
Y
1570
Maximum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase C
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
202
xx xx xx xx xx
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Units
kVA /Scale kVA /Scale kVA /Scale
Range Notes
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Apparent Power (SB)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Apparent Power (SC)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
4-wire system = SA+SB+SC
3-wire system = 3-Phase apparent power
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
➀
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only)
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only)
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only)
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power (4wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
Reported value is mapped from 0-
2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power.
4-wire system only
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Size Type Access Reg
1571
Name
Maximum
Displacement
Power Factor,
Total
1 Integer RO
1572
Maximum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase A
1573
Maximum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase B
1574
Maximum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Phase C
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Scale
xx xx xx
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
1575
Maximum
Alternate
Displacement
Power Factor,
Total
1 Integer
Maximum—Frequence and Temperature
RO Y
1580
Maximum
Frequency
1 Integer RO Y
1581
Maximum
Temperature
Maximum—Analog Inputs
1 Integer RO Y
1590
1591
1592
1593
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 1
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 2
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 3
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 4
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
xx xx xx
0.001
0.01Hz
0.10Hz
0.1
°
C xx
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A) xx
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A) xx
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A) xx
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Range
1,000
-100 to 100
➀
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 2,000
Notes
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power (4-wire system only). Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with
1000 representing unity, values below
1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
Derived using only fundamental frequency of the real and apparent power. Reported value is mapped from 0-2000, with 1000 representing unity, values below 1000 representing lagging, and values above 1000 representing leading.
(50/60Hz)
4,500 – 6,700
(400Hz)
3,500 – 4,500
(-32,768 if N/A)
-1,000 – 1,000
Frequency of circuits being monitored.
If the frequency is out of range, the register will be –32,768.
Internal unit temperature
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
203
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
Name
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 5
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 6
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 7
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 8
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 9
1599
Maximum
Auxiliary Analog
Input Value,
User-Selected
Input 10
Maximum—THD
1600
1601
1602
Maximum
THD/thd Current,
Phase A
Maximum
THD/thd Current,
Phase B
Maximum
THD/thd Current,
Phase C
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1603
Maximum
THD/thd Current,
Phase N
1 Integer RO Y
1604
1607
1608
1609
1610
Maximum
THD/thd Current,
Ground
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase A-N
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase B-N
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase C-N
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase N-G
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Units Range
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Refer to Analog
Input Setup
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
Notes
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase A Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase B Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase C Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Phase N Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion,
Ground Current
Expressed as % of fundamental
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
204
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1611
1612
1613
Name
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase A-B
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase B-C
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
Phase C-A
Size
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
1615
1616
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
3-Phase Average
L-N
Maximum
THD/thd Voltage,
3-Phase Average
L-L
1
1
Maximum—Transformer Heating
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
Maximum
Current K-Factor,
Phase A
Maximum
Current K-Factor,
Phase B
Maximum
Current K-Factor,
Phase C
Maximum Crest
Factor, Current,
Phase A
Maximum Crest
Factor, Current,
Phase B
Maximum Crest
Factor, Current,
Phase C
Maximum Crest
Factor, Current,
Neutral
Maximum Crest
Factor,
Voltage A-N/A-B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1626
1627
Maximum Crest
Factor,
Voltage B-N/B-C
Maximum Crest
Factor,
Voltage C-N/C-A
1
1
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
Y
Y
Maximum—Fundamental Magnitudes and Angles—Current
1630
1631
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase A
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase A
1
1
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
A xx
Units
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Range
0 – 32,767
Notes
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
4-wire system only
0 – 32,767
Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion
Expressed as % of fundamental
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
0 – 10,000
Maximum Transformer Crest Factor
4-wire system only
Maximum Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
Maximum Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Maximum Transformer Crest Factor
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
Maximum Transformer Crest Factor
Maximum Transformer Crest Factor
Maximum Transformer Crest Factor
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
205
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
Name
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase B
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase B
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Phase C
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Phase C
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Neutral
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Neutral
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
Ground
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1639
Maximum
Current
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, Ground
1 Integer RO Y
Maximum—Fundamental Magnitudes and Angles—Voltage
1644
1645
1646
Maximum
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
A-N/A-B
Maximum
Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, A-N/A-B
Maximum
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
B-N/B-C
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
Y
1647
Maximum
Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, B-N/B-C
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
A xx
A xx
B xx
C xx
D xx
D xx
Units
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Range
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N
4-wire system only
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
Notes
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N/A-B Voltage Angle
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to itself
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N (4-wire) or A-B (3wire)
206
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1648
1649
1650
Name
Maximum
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
C-N/C-A
Maximum
Voltage
Fundamental
Coincident
Angle, C-N/C-A
Maximum
Voltage
Fundamental
RMS Magnitude,
N-G
Size
1
1
1
1651
Maximum
Voltage Fund.
Coincident
Angle, N-G
1
Maximum—Fundamental Power
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
Maximum
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase A
Maximum
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase B
Maximum
Fundamental
Real Power,
Phase C
Maximum
Fundamental
Real Power, Total
Maximum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase A
Maximum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase B
Maximum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Phase C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
1662
Maximum
Fundamental
Reactive Power,
Total
1 Integer RO
Maximum—Distortion Power and Power Factort
1664
Maximum
Distortion Power,
Phase A
1 Integer RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1665
Maximum
Distortion Power,
Phase B
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
D xx
E xx
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
° kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kVAr/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only kVAr/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only kVAr/Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only kVAr/Scale -32,767 – 32,767 kW/Scale kW/Scale
Range
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
Notes
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N (4-wire) or A-B (3wire)
0 – 3,599
(-32,768 if N/A)
Angle at the time of magnitude
Maximum
Referenced to A-N
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
207
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
Name
Maximum
Distortion Power,
Phase C
Maximum
Distortion Power,
Total
Maximum
Distortion Factor,
Phase A
Maximum
Distortion Factor,
Phase B
Maximum
Distortion Factor,
Phase C
Size
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
1671
Maximum
Distortion Factor,
Total
1 Integer
Maximum—Harmonic Current and Voltage
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
Maximum
Harmonic
Current, Phase A
Maximum
Harmonic
Current, Phase B
Maximum
Harmonic
Current, Phase C
Maximum
Harmonic
Current, Neutral
Maximum
Harmonic
Voltage A
Maximum
Harmonic
Voltage B
Maximum
Harmonic
Voltage C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
1681
Maximum Total
Demand
Distortion
1 Integer
Maximum—Sequence Components
1684
1685
1686
Maximum
Current, Positive
Sequence,
Magnitude
Maximum
Current, Positive
Sequence, Angle
Maximum
Current,
Negative
Sequence,
Magnitude
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
F
F
F
F
F
F
A
A
A
B
D
D
D xx
A xx
A
Units
kW/Scale kW/Scale
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Amperes/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
Volts/Scale
0.01%
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
Range Notes
-32,767 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
-32,767 – 32,767
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 1,000
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
(-32,768 if N/A)
4-wire system only
0 – 32,767
Voltage A-N (4-wire system)
Voltage A-B (3-wire system)
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
0 – 10,000
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
Voltage B-N (4-wire system)
Voltage B-C (3-wire system)
Voltage C-N (4-wire system)
Voltage C-A (3-wire system)
208
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
Name
Maximum
Voltage, Zero
Sequence,
Magnitude
Maximum
Voltage, Zero
Sequence, Angle
Maximum
Current,
Sequence,
Unbalance
Maximum
Voltage,
Sequence,
Unbalance
Maximum
Current,
Sequence
Unbalance
Factor
Maximum
Voltage,
Sequence
Unbalance
Factor
Maximum
Current,
Negative
Sequence, Angle
Maximum
Current, Zero
Sequence,
Magnitude
Maximum
Current, Zero
Sequence, Angle
Maximum
Voltage, Positive
Sequence,
Magnitude
Maximum
Voltage, Positive
Sequence, Angle
Maximum
Voltage,
Negative
Sequence,
Magnitude
Maximum
Voltage,
Negative
Sequence, Angle
Energy
1700 Energy, Real In
1704
Energy, Reactive
In
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Mod10
Mod10
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
1708 Energy, Real Out 4 Mod10 RO Y
1712
Energy, Reactive
Out
4 Mod10 RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx
A xx
D xx
D xx
D xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Units
0.1
°
Amperes/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
Volts/Scale
0.1
°
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
0.10%
WH
VArH
WH
VArH
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
Range
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
0 – 32,767
0 – 3,599
-1,000 – 1,000
-1,000 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
0 – 1,000
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Notes
Negative Sequence / Positive
Sequence
Negative Sequence / Positive
Sequence
3-Phase total real energy into the load
3-Phase total reactive energy into the load
3-Phase total real energy out of the load
3-Phase total reactive energy out of the load
209
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name
1716
Energy, Real
Total
)
(signed/absolute
1720
Energy, Reactive
Total
)
(signed/absolute
1724 Energy, Apparent
1728
1732
1736
1740
Energy,
Conditional Real
In
Energy,
Conditional
Reactive In
Energy,
Conditional Real
Out
Energy,
Conditional
Reactive Out
1744
1748
1751
1754
1757
1760
1763
1767
Energy,
Conditional
Apparent
Energy,
Incremental Real
In, Last
Complete
Interval
Energy.
Incremental
Reactive In, Last
Complete
Interval
Energy,
Incremental Real
Out, Last
Complete
Interval
Energy,
Incremental
Reactive Out,
Last Complete
Interval
Energy,
Incremental
Apparent, Last
Complete
Interval
DateTime Last
Complete
Incremental
Energy Interval
Energy,
Incremental Real
In, Present
Interval
Size
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
Type
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
DateTime
Mod10
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1770
Energy.
Incremental
Reactive In,
Present Interval
3 Mod10 RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Units
WH
VArH
VAH
WH
VArH
WH
VArH
VAH
WH
VArH
WH
VArH
VAH
Range
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
See Template
➁
See Template
➁
WH
VArH
(3)
(3)
Notes
Total Real Energy In, Out or In + Out
Total Reactive Energy In, Out or In +
Out
3-Phase total apparent energy
3-Phase total accumulated conditional real energy into the load
3-Phase total accumulated conditional reactive energy into the load
3-Phase total accumulated conditional real energy out of the load
3-Phase total accumulated conditional reactive energy out of the load
3-Phase total accumulated conditional apparent energy
3-Phase total accumulated incremental real energy into the load
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy into the load
3-Phase total accumulated incremental real energy out of the load
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy out of the load
3-Phase total accumulated incremental apparent energy
3-Phase total accumulated incremental real energy into the load
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy into the load
210
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
1773
1776
1779
1782
1785
1788
1791
Name
Energy,
Incremental Real
Out, Present
Interval
Energy,
Incremental
Reactive Out,
Present Interval
Energy,
Incremental
Apparent,
Present Interval
Energy,
Reactive,
Quadrant 1
Energy,
Reactive,
Quadrant 2
Energy,
Reactive,
Quadrant 3
Energy,
Reactive,
Quadrant 4
Size
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Type
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
Mod10
1794
Conditional
Energy Control
Status
1 Integer
Note:
(1) 0 – 9,999,999,999,999,999
(2) -9,999,999,999,999,999 – 9,999,999,999,999,999
(3) 0 – 999,999,999,999
Demand—Power Demand Channels
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
Last Demand
Real Power, 3-
Phase Total
Present Demand
Real Power, 3-
Phase Total
Running Average
Demand
Real Power, 3-
Phase Total
Predicted
Demand
Real Power, 3-
Phase Total
Peak Demand
Real Power, 3-
Phase Total
Peak Demand
DateTime
Real Power, 3-
Phase Total
1
1
1
1
1
4
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
DateTime
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
2159
Cumulative
Demand
Real Power, 3-
Phase Total
2 Long RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
F
F
F
F
F xx
F
Units
WH
VArH
VAH
VArH
VArH
VArH
VArH xx kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale kW/Scale
Range
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
0 – 1
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy – quadrant 1
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy – quadrant 2
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy – quadrant 3
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy – quadrant 4
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present real power demand for last completed demand interval – updated every sub-interval
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present real power demand for present demand interval
-32,767 – 32,767
Predicted real power demand at the end of the present interval
-2147483648 –
2147483647
Notes
3-Phase total accumulated incremental real energy out of the load
3-Phase total accumulated incremental reactive energy out of the load
3-Phase total accumulated incremental apparent energy
-32,767 – 32,767 Updated every second
-32,767 – 32,767
See Template
➁
See Template
➁
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
211
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
2161
2162
2163
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2174
2176
2177
2178
2180
2181
Name
Peak Demand
Reactive Power,
3-Phase Total
Peak Demand
DateTime
Reactive Power,
3-Phase Total
Cumulative
Demand
Reactive Power,
3-Phase Total
Power Factor,
Average @ Peak
Demand,
Reactive Power
Power Demand,
Real @
Peak Demand,
Reactive Power
Power Demand,
Apparent @
Peak Demand,
Reactive Power
Last Demand
Apparent Power
3-Phase Total
Present Demand
Apparent Power,
3-Phase Total
Power Factor,
Average @ Peak
Demand, Real
Power
Power Demand,
Reactive @ Peak
Demand, Real
Power
Power Demand,
Apparent @
Peak Demand,
Real Power
Last Demand
Reactive Power,
3-Phase Total
Present Demand
Reactive Power,
3-Phase Total
Running Average
Demand
Reactive Power,
3-Phase Total
Predicted
Demand
Reactive Power,
3-Phase Total
Size
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
DateTime
Long
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
2182
Running Average
Demand
Apparent Power,
3-Phase Total
1 Integer RO N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
xx
F
F
F
F
F
F
F xx
F xx
F
F
F
F
F
Units
0.001
kVAr/Scale kVA/Scale kVAr /Scale kVAr /Scale kVAr /Scale kVAr /Scale kVAr /Scale
Range Notes
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
Average True Power Factor at the time of the Peak Real Demand
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present reactive power demand for last completed demand interval – updated every sub-interval
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present real power demand for present demand interval
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present reactive power demand, running average demand calculation of short duration – updated every second
-32,767 – 32,767
Predicted reactive power demand at the end of the present interval
See Template
➁
See Template
➁ kVAr /Scale
0.001
kW/Scale kVA/Scale kVA /Scale kVA /Scale kVA /Scale
-32,767 – 32,767
Reactive Power Demand at the time of the Peak Real Demand
0 – 32,767
-32,767 – 32,767
-2147483648 –
2147483647
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
Apparent Power Demand at the time of the Peak Real Demand
Average True Power Factor at the time of the Peak Reactive Demand
-32,767 – 32,767
Real Power Demand at the time of the
Peak Reactive Demand
0 – 32,767
Apparent Power Demand at the time of the Peak Reactive Demand
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present apparent power demand for last completed demand interval – updated every sub-interval
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present apparent power demand for present demand interval
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total present apparent power demand, running average demand calculation of short duration – updated every second
212
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
2183
2184
2185
2189
2191
Name
Predicted
Demand
Apparent Power,
3-Phase Total
Peak Demand
Apparent Power,
3-Phase Total
Peak Demand
DateTime
Apparent Power,
3-Phase Total
Cumulative
Demand
Apparent Power,
3-Phase Total
Power Factor,
Average @ Peak
Demand,
Apparent Power
2192
2193
Power Demand,
Real @ Peak
Demand,
Apparent Power
Power Demand,
Reactive @ Peak
Demand,
Apparent Power
System Configuration
Size
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
DateTime
Long
Integer
Integer
Integer
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
NV
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
3000
3002
3014
3034
3039
3043
3044
3045
Circuit Monitor
Label
Circuit Monitor
Nameplate
Circuit Monitor
Present
Operating
System
Firmware
Revision Level
Present
Date/Time
Last Unit Restart
Date Time
Number of
Metering System
Restarts
Number of
Control Power
Failures
Date/Time of
Last Control
Power Failure
2
8
1
4
4
1
1
4
Character
Character
Integer
DateTime
DateTime
Integer
Integer
DateTime
R/CW
R/CW
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
Scale
F
F xx
F xx
F
F xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Units
kVA /Scale kVA /Scale
See Template
➁
See Template
➁
Date/Time of 3-Phase peak apparent power demand kVA /Scale
0.001
kW/Scale kVAr/Scale xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx
-32,767 – 32,767
Predicted apparent power demand at the end of the present interval
-32,767 – 32,767
3-Phase total peak apparent power demand peak
-2,147,483,648 –
2,147,483,647
Cumulative Demand, Apparent Power
-32,767 – 32,767
Real Power Demand at the time of the
Peak Apparent Demand xxxxxxx xxxxxxx
See Template
➁
See Template
➁
See Template
➁
See Template
➁
1
1
Range
1,000
-100 to 100
(-32,768 if N/A)
➀
0 – 32,767
0x0000 – 0xFFFF
0 – 32,767
0 – 32,767
See Template
➁
See Template
➁
Notes
Average True Power Factor at the time of the Peak Apparent Demand
Reactive Power Demand at the time of the Peak Apparent Demand
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
213
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg Name Size Type Access NV Scale
3050 Self-Test Results 1 Bitmap
3051 Self Test Results 1 Bitmap
3052
Configuration
Modified
214
1 Integer
RO
RO
RO
N
N
Y
3053
3054
3055
3056
Installed Log
Memory
Free Log
Memory
Log Memory
Cluster Size
Programmed
Disk On Chip
Version Number
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
R/W
Y
Y
Y
N
3058
Real Time Clock
Factory
Calibration
1 Integer RO Y
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Clusters
Clusters
Bytes xxxxxxx ppm
Units
xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx
Range Notes
0 = Normal; 1 = Error
0x0000 – 0xFFFF
Bit 00 = Is set to "1" if any failure occurs
Bit 01 = RTC failure
Bit 02 = MCF UART #1 failure
Bit 03 = MCF UART #2 failure
Bit 04 = PLD UART failure
Bit 05 = Metering Collection overrun failure
Bit 06 = Metering Process 0.1 overrun failure
Bit 07 = Metering Process 1.0 overrun failure
Bit 08 = Disk-on-Chip failure
Bit 09 = Display failure
Bit 10 = CV Module failure
Bit 11 = Aux Plug EEPROM failure
Bit 12 = Flash Memory failure
Bit 13 = Dram Memory failure
Bit 14 = Simtek Memory failure
Bit 15 = RTC Memory failure
0 = Normal; 1 = Error
0x0000 – 0xFFFF
Bit 00 = Aux IO failure
Bit 01 = Option Slot A module failure
Bit 02 = Option Slot B module failure
Bit 03 = IOX module failure
Bit 04 = Not used
Bit 05 =
Bit 06 =
Bit 07 =
Bit 08 = OS Create failure
Bit 09 = OS Queue overrun failure
Bit 10 = Not used
Bit 11 = Not used
Bit 12 =
Bit 13 = Systems shut down due to continuous reset
Bit 14 = Unit in Download, Condition A
Bit 15 = Unit in Download, Condition B
Used by sub-systems to indicate that a value used within that system has been internally modified
0 = No modifications; 1 =
Modifications
0x0000 – 0xFFFF Bit 00 = Summary bit
Bit 01 = Metering System
Bit 02 = Communications System
Bit 03 = Alarm System
Bit 04 = File System
Bit 05 = Auxiliary IO System
Bit 06 = Display System
0 – 65,535
0 – 65,535
0 – 65,535
0x0000 – 0xFFFF
-63 – 126
(-) = Slow down
(+) = Speed up
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
Table C–3: Abbreviated Register List (continued)
Reg
3059
3061
Name
Real Time Clock
Field Calibration
Installed Log
Memory
Size
1
1
Type
Integer
Integer
Access
R/CW
RO
NV
Y
Y
Scale
xx xx
3073
Installed Option –
Slot A
1 Integer RO
3074
Installed Option –
Slot B
1 Integer RO
3075
Installed Option –
IO Extender
3093 Present Month
3094 Present Day
3095 Present Year
3096 Present Hour
3097 Present Minute
3098 Present Second
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
Integer
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
N xx
N xx
N
3099 Day of Week 1 Integer RO N
RO = Read only.
R/CW = Read configure writeable if in a setup session.
NV = Nonvolatile.
➁
See “How Power Factor is Stored in the Register” on page 178.
See “How Date and Time Are Stored in Registers” on page 178.
N
N
N
N
N
N xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
Units
ppm
Mbytes xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx
Months
Days
Years
Hours
Minutes
Seconds
1.0
Range
-63 – 126
(-) = Slow down
(+) = Speed up
Notes
0 – 65,535
0 – 16
0 – 7
0, 5
1 – 12
1 – 31
2,000 – 2,043
0 – 23
0 – 59
0 – 59
1 – 7
0 = Not Installed
1 = IOC44
2 = Reserved
3 = Reserved
4 = Reserved
5 = Reserved
6 = Ethernet Option Module
0 = Not Installed
1 = IOC44
2 = Reserved
3 = Reserved
4 = Reserved
5 = Reserved
6 = Ethernet Option Module
7 = Production Test Load Board
0 = Not Installed
5 = Installed
Sunday = 1
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
215
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Appendix C—Abbreviated Register Listing
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
216
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
G
LOSSARY
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Glossary
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
accumulated energy—energy can accumulate in either signed or unsigned (absolute) mode. In signed mode, the direction of power flow is considered and the accumulated energy magnitude may increase and decrease. In absolute mode, energy accumulates as a positive regardless of the power flow direction.
address—see device address. See also Ethernet address.
ANSI—American National Standards Institute.
baud rate—specifies how fast data is transmitted across a network port.
block interval demand—power demand calculation method for a block of time and includes three ways to apply calculating to that block of time using the sliding block, fixed block, or rolling block method.
coincident readings—two readings that are recorded at the same time.
command interface—used to issue commands such as reset commands and to manually operate relays contained in registers 8000–8149.
communications link—a chain of devices such as circuit monitors and power meters that are connected by a communications cable to a communications port.
conditional energy—energy accumulates only when a certain condition occurs.
control power—provides power to the circuit monitor.
control power transformer (CPT)—transformer to reduce control power voltage to the meter.
crest factor (CF)—crest factor of voltage or current is the ratio of peak values to rms values.
current transformer (CT)—current transformer for current inputs.
current unbalance—percentage difference between each phase voltage with respect to the average of all phase currents.
current/voltage module—an interchangeable part of the circuit monitor where all metering data acquisition occurs.
default—a value loaded into the circuit monitor at the factory that you can configure.
demand—average value of a quantity, such as power, over a specified interval of time.
device address—defines where the circuit monitor (or other devices) reside in the power monitoring system.
displacement power factor (dPF)—cosine of the angle between the fundamental components of current and voltage, which represents the time lag between fundamental voltage and current.
217
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Glossary
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
EN50160—a European standard that defines the quality of the voltage a customer can expect to receive from the electric utility.
Ethernet address—a unique number that identifies the device in the
Ethernet network and is always written as combination of eleven numbers such as 199.186.195.23.
event—the occurrence of an alarm condition, such as Undervoltage Phase
A, configured in the circuit monitor.
firmware—operating system within the circuit monitor.
frequency—number of cycles in one second.
fundamental—value of voltage or current corresponding to the portion of the signal at the power frequency (50, 60, or 400 Hz).
generic demand profile—up to 10 quantities on which any of the demand calculations can be performed (thermal demand, block interval demand, or synchronized demand). Two generic demand profiles can be set up in the circuit monitor.
harmonic power—difference between total power and fundamental power. A negative value indicates harmonic power flow out of the load. A positive value indicates harmonic power flow into the load.
harmonics—the circuit monitor stores in registers the magnitude and angle of individual harmonics up to the 63rd harmonic. Distorted voltages and currents can be represented by a series of sinusoidal signals whose frequencies are multipliers of some fundamental frequency, such as 60 Hz.
holding register—register that holds the next value to be transmitted.
IEC—International Electrotechnical Commission.
incremental energy—accumulates energy during a user-defined timed interval.
IOX—input/output extender that is an optional part of the circuit monitor where up to eight analog or digital I/O modules can be added to expand the
I/O capabilities of the circuit monitor.
K-factor—a numerical rating used to specify power transformers for non linear loads. It describes a transformer’s ability to serve nonlinear loads without exceeding rated temperature rise limits.
KYZ output—pulse output from a metering device where each pulse has a weight assigned to it which represents an amount of energy or other value.
LCD—liquid crystal display.
line-to-line voltages—measurement of the rms line-to-line voltages of the circuit.
line-to-neutral voltages—measurement of the rms line-to-neutral voltages of the circuit.
logging—recording data at user-defined intervals in the circuit monitor’s nonvolatile memory.
218
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Glossary
maximum value—highest value recorded of the instantaneous quantity such as Phase A Current, Phase A Voltage, etc., since the last reset of the minimums and maximums.
minimum value—lowest value recorded of the instantaneous quantity such as Phase A Current, Phase A Voltage, etc., since the last reset of the minimums and maximums.
nominal—typical or average.
onboard—refers to data stored in the circuit monitor.
option cards—optional, field-installable accessories for the circuit monitor that expand the I/O and Ethernet communications capabilities because they can be inserted into slots in the circuit monitor.
overvoltage—increase in effective voltage to greater than 110 percent for longer than one minute.
parity—refers to binary numbers sent over the communications link. An extra bit is added so that the number of ones in the binary number is either even or odd, depending on your configuration). Used to detect errors in the transmission of data.
partial interval demand—calculation of energy thus far in a present interval. Equal to energy accumulated thus far in the interval divided by the length of the complete interval.
peak demand current—highest demand current measured in amperes since the last reset of demand. See also peak value.
peak demand real power—highest demand real power measured since the last rest of demand.
peak demand voltage—highest demand voltage measured since the last reset of demand voltage. See also peak value.
peak demand—highest demand measured since the last reset of peak demand.
peak value—of voltage or current is the maximum or minimum crest value of a waveform.
phase currents (rms)—measurement in amperes of the rms current for each of the three phases of the circuit. See also peak value.
phase rotation—phase rotations refers to the order in which the instantaneous values of the voltages or currents of the system reach their maximum positive values. Two phase rotations are possible: A-B-C or
A-C-B.
potential transformer (PT)—also known as a voltage transformer.
power factor (PF)—true power factor is the ratio of real power to apparent power using the complete harmonic content of real and apparent power.
Calculated by dividing watts by volt amperes. Power factor is the difference between the total power your utility delivers and the portion of total power that does useful work. Power factor is the degree to which voltage and current to a load are out of phase. See also displacement power factor.
219
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Glossary
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
predicted demand—the circuit monitor takes into account the energy consumption thus far in the present interval and the present rate of consumption to predict demand power at the end of the present interval.
quantity—a parameter that the circuit monitor can measure or calculate such as current, voltage, power factor, etc.
real power—calculation of the real power (3-phase total and per-phase real power calculated) to obtain kilowatts.
recloser sequence—a series of voltage sags caused by a utility breaker opening a number of consecutive times in an effort to clear a fault. See also sag/swell.
rms—root mean square. Circuit monitors are true rms sensing devices.
See also harmonics (rms).
sag/swell—fluctuation (decreasing or increasing) in voltage or current in the electrical system being monitored. See also, voltage sag and voltage
swell.
scale factor—multipliers that the circuit monitor uses to make values fit into the register where information is stored.
SMS—see System Manager Software.
synchronized demand—demand intervals in the circuit monitor that can be synchronized with another device using an external pulse, a command sent over communications, or the circuit monitor’s internal real-time clock.
System Manager Software ( SMS
)—software designed by PowerLogic for use in evaluating power monitoring and control data.
system type—a unique code assigned to each type of system wiring configuration of the circuit monitor.
thermal demand—demand calculation based on thermal response.
TIF/IT—telephone influence factor used to assess the interference of power distribution circuits with audio communications circuits.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD or thd)—indicates the degree to which the voltage or current signal is distorted in a circuit.
total power factor—see power factor.
transient—sudden change in the steady-state condition of voltage or current.
troubleshooting—evaluating and attempting to correct problems with the circuit monitor’s operation.
true power factor—see power factor.
undervoltage—decrease in effective voltage to less than 90% for longer than one minute.
VAR—volt ampere reactive.
VFD—vacuum fluorescent display.
220
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Glossary
voltage interruption—complete loss of power where no voltage remains in the circuit.
voltage sag—a brief decrease in effective voltage lasting more than one minute.
voltage swell—increase in effective voltage for up to one minute in duration.
voltage transformer (VT)—see potential transformer.
voltage unbalance—percentage difference between each phase voltage with respect to the average of all phase voltages.
waveform capture—can be done for all current and voltage channels in the circuit monitor.
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
221
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Glossary
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
222
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
I
NDEX
Numerics
100 millisecond
A
accumulate energy
adaptive waveform captures 108 resolutions 108
address
alarm levels
with different pickups and dropouts 85
alarm log
defining storage space for 116
alarms
acknowledging high priority alarms 46
alarm conditions 83, 91 alarm groups 19, 83
creating levels for multiple alarms 85
scaling alarm setpoints 89, 90
using with waveform captures 107, 108
using with isolated receivers 81
B
bell
block interval demand method 60
buttons
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
C
calculating
calibration of circuit monitor 137
changing
date format of circuit monitor 11
channels
using to verify utility charges 65
circuit monitor
command interface
changing configuration registers 162
overview 157 registers for 157
command synchronized demand 62
communications
problems with PC communication 139
conditional energy controlling from the command interface
consumption
pulse weight 65 scale factor 65
contacting technical support 137
contrast
adjusting contrast on display 8
correlation sequence number 85
CT and PT
custom
custom screens
cycles and waveform captures 108
D
data log 101 clearing the logs 101
organizing log files 102 storage 102
storage in circuit monitor 136
demand
pulse weight 65 scale factor 65
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Index
demand calculation method
demand current calculation 62 demand power calculation methods 62
demand power calculation methods 59
input pulse demand metering 65
device address
diagnostics
performing wiring error test 49
input pulse demand channels 65
displacement power factor described 69
display
disturbance monitoring
types of waveform captures 107
disturbance waveform capture 107 resolution 107
dropout and pickup setpoints 84
dropouts used with adaptive waveform capture
E
circuit monitor operation when enabled
energy
conditional energy registers 163
energy readings 67 reactive accumulated 67
equipment sensitivity
disturbance monitoring for 115
Ethernet communications card
223
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Index
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
event
calculating duration of event 85 correlation sequence number 85
F
firmware determining series and firmware version
frequency
G
H
harmonic
setting up individual calculations 165
I
I/O
I/O Extender
impulsive transient alarm
using with the command interface 164
infrared port
inputs
accepting pulse from another meter 62
digital inputs operating modes 72
options for the I/O Extender 71
interval min/max/average log 56, 103
isolated receiver
K
calculating watt hours per pulse 80
L
labels
locking
logic gates for Boolean alarms 96
logs 101 alarm log 101 clearing data logs 101 data log file 101
interval min/ax/average log 103 min/max log 103
M
maintenance
manufacture date of circuit monitor 137
mechanical relay outputs
menu button
menu options
metered values
monitoring
monitoring sags and swells 107
motor start capturing with 100 ms event recording
224
N
O
one-second real-time readings 55
operation
problems with the circuit monitor 138 problems with the display 138
using the command interface 157
outputs
P
parity
phase loss
alarm type for current 88 alarm type for voltage 88 phase reversal alarm type 88
phase rotation
pickups and dropouts
PLC
using to create alarm levels 86
power demand calculation method.
see demand calculation method 19
register format 178 storage of 178
predicted demand calculation 63
problems
protocols
register addressing convention 177
pulse initiator applications 78
pulse weight 65 consumption 65 demand 65
pulses
Q
creating demand profile using generic
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
R
reactive power
recloser sequence
recording
events using 100ms event recording 108 sag/swell data 108
register
addressing convention 177 organization of bits 177
registers
reading and writing from the display 48
using the command interface 162
relays
assigning multiple alarm conditions to 78
internal or external control of 75
operating using command interface 158
setpoint-controlled relay functions 86 sounding bell using a relay 86
resets
values in generic demand profile 64
S
sag/swell
scale factor 65 consumption 65 demand 65
set up
individual harmonic calculations 165
infrared port communications 12
setpoint
SMS
steady-state waveform capture 107 initiating 107
suspected errors
synchronizing
demand interval to internal clock 62 demand interval to multiple meters 62 to PLC command 62
system type
T
testing
dielectric (hi-pot) test 135 megger test 135
THD
Total Demand Distortion 68 total harmonic distortion 68, 107
transient
transient alarm
alarm log 142 impulsive transient alarm 142
U
unbalance current alarm type 87
unbalance voltage alarm type 88
upgrading
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Index
V
VAR sign convention
voltage disturbance monitoring 113 voltage sag 113, 114
circuit monitor capabilities during 115
using waveform captures to detect 114
voltage swell
circuit monitor capabilities during 115
W
watthours
calculating watthours per KYZ pulse 80
waveform captures
100 ms event recording 108 adaptive waveform capture 108
disturbance waveform captures 107
steady-state waveform captures 107
using to detect voltage sag 114
wiring
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
225
PowerLogic® Circuit Monitor Series 4000 Reference Manual
Index
63230-300-212B1
12/2005
226
© 2005 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
PowerLogic
®
Circuit Monitor
Schneider Electric
295 Tech Park Drive, Suite 100
Lavergne, TN 37086
Tel: +1 (615) 287-3400 www.schneider-electric.com
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.
63230-300-212B1 12/2005
All Rights Reserved
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project